Category: Volume 6 – Number 2 – January 1996

  • Rewiring the Culture

    Brian Evenson

    Department of English
    Oklahoma State University
    evenson@osuunx.ucc.okstate.edu

     

     

    Marcus, Ben. The Age of Wire and String. New York: Knopf, 1995.

     

    Pierre Klossowski, in Sade, My Neighbor, offers two statements that might serve to introduce the startling, and often transgressive, vignettes of Ben Marcus’s The Age of Wire and String. The first is the assertion that “it is not by arguments that [he] can obtain the assent of his interlocutor but by complicity” (27). The second is the realization that “reason itself . . . is but a form of passion” (67-8).

     

    The Age of Wire and String thrusts into the forms of reasonable thought a great deal of passion, revivifying dead ways of speaking by short-circuiting them. The formal genres of both the hard and social sciences are manipulated by eccentric but nearly invisible narrators who, having emptied objective forms of their original content, fill them with highly original visions of the world. By applying extreme subjective pressure to the objective world, Marcus warps and splays the forms of capture we have come to expect. Where Marcus differs from less successful experimenters is that rather than merely allowing science to turn inward, revealing the subjectivity innate to any apparently objective process, he forces the subjective pressure to deflect again outward — thus revealing an objectivity that can only be reached through the subjective. In pursuing a line of flight that cleaves through a progression of selves and then flees outward, Marcus offers an array of voices to lay bare the whole of contemporary culture.

     

    The Age of Wire and String is a non-system masquerading as a system. It is referred to, in the mock-argument at the book’s beginning, as a device for “cataloging a culture.” The book consists of eight divisions of stories which parse the culture into eight broad interrelated topics — Sleep, God, Food, The House, Animal, Weather, Persons, The Society. Each section is supplemented by a list of terms which sets out to define words that may or may not be relevant to the fictions of a particular section. These include objects as promising as:

     

    FUDGE GIRDLE, THE Crumpets of cooked or flattened chocolage, bound or fastened by wire. This garment is spreadable. . . . (43)

     

    MATH GUN, THE 1. Mouth of the Father, equipped with a red freckle, glistening. It is shined by foods, dulled with water, left alone by all else. 2. His pencil. . . . (26)

     

    ARKANSAS 9 SERIES Organization of musical patterns or tropes that disrupt the flesh of the listener. (122)

     

    The arrangement of the book and the definition of terms seem formal and orderly enough, and on the surface The Age of Wire and String seems to offer a fictional world holding the same sort of relation to the real world as does Borges’ Uqbar. However, the orderliness of the surface is quickly disrupted, and it becomes clear that what Marcus offers is not a single world but elements of several similar, but not completely compatible, worlds. Though the pieces all have some relation, they cannot be thought of as generating a single alternate reality; instead, the space they create is heterotopic, bringing together disparate elements whose connection cannot be adequately mapped, but which are joined nonetheless. How is one to bring together , for instance, the introduction (in Montana) of clothing made from food products, the song’s capacity for mutilating the body of a man on horseback, sleep’s ability to forestall the destruction of the house, a string’s tendency to fall in the shape of the next animal to be slain, and the more passionate and worldly spectacle of the mad invader who ties up everyone in the house and forces them to watch as he commits suicide? The impact of the book can be found less in the individual pieces than in the connections which spread from text to text, which make a rhizome of the different pieces and which allow one to travel from one disparate locale to another.

     

    Within the text, the author’s name, as an administrative function by which to gather the book into a whole, falls under suspicion, for one discovers multiple definitions for “BEN MARCUS, THE,” including:

     

    1. False map, scroll caul, or parchment . . . a fitful chart of darkness. When properly decoded, it indicates only that we should destroy it and look elsewhere for instruction. . . . 2. The garment that is too heavy to allow movement. . . . 3. Figure from which the antiperson is derived; or, simply, the antiperson. It must refer uselessly and endlessly and always to weather, food, birds, or cloth. . . . (77)

     

    The Ben Marcus becomes three functions, all of which mock the way in which we think through significance and proprietorship in fiction, the different functions far from compatible.

     

    Throughout the stories, Marcus performs the theft and adaptation of a variety of speech genres. He is able to treat certain styles and manners of speaking — certain forms of expression that give in their rightful or common context the seductions of convincingness (scientific discourse, prayer, technical writing, historical lecture, encyclopedia entries) — in ways that expose the strategies and seductions of the forms, opening them to new types of content. By bringing together accepted forms of discourse with unexpected content (in the attempt, for instance, to scientifically define a dog as a mode of heat transference, or in the offering of a prayer meant to preserve the wires of the house) the devices that allow for a form’s power of seduction ar e revealed and neutralized. But, by passing into new contexts, these forms are given a new power. They persist as walking frames over which a transient mythology begins to spread, vying to establish itself as the new truth.

     

    The whole world rewires itself, connections being established where none were believed to exist before. What might have once begun as the simple act of branching a plug into a wall socket becomes a transgressive and sublime ritual, as an almost imperceptible character tries to piece together a collapsed life, perhaps believing that what has gone wrong on a human level must be corrected or else natural laws will collapse. What results is a technical explanation of the oddest kind:

     

    Intercourse with resuscitated wife for particular number of days, superstitious act designed to insure safe operation of household machinery. Electricity mourns the absence of the energy form (wife) within the household’s walls by stalling its flow to the outlets. As such, an improvised friction needs to take the place of electricity, to goad the natural currents back to their proper levels. This is achieved with the dead wife. She must be found, revived, and then penetrated until heat fills the room, until the toaster is shooting bread onto the floor, until she is smiling beneath you with black teeth and grabbing your bottom. Then the vacuum rides by and no one is pushing it, it is on full steam. Days flip past in chunks of fake light, and the intercourse is placed in the back of the mind. But it is always there, that moving into a static-ridden corpse that once spoke familiar messages in the morning when the sun was new. (7)

     

    Here the narrator reveals himself only in the definition of intercourse as a superstitious act, in the formal, technical framing of necrophilia, and in his attempt to thrust the experience on the reader by using the second person. The result is a transgressive act framed in measured terms and careful language, at once more beautiful and more disturbing than the usual approach to such acts can be.

     

    The nature of transgression itself as an artistic project is defined in another piece, “The Golden Monica,” which takes for its utterance the mode of academic discourse. Here it becomes clear that for Marcus, as for Klossowski’s Sade, the aesthetic purpose is not so much to convince the reader as to establish complicity. As Marcus suggests elsewhere, “members alternate performing and watching, until there is no difference” (137). “The Golden Monica” serves to extrapolate this statement, speaking of “the phenomenon of the intruder or mad invader, who enters the American house in order to extinguish himself” in the presence of the inhabitants of the house (47). He binds the inhabitants in such a way that they must watch him, and then settles in the middle of them as he conducts a self-made ritual which will culminate in his demise. After the suicide, the narrator postulates, one of the members of the family will somehow manage to get free of the restraints and flee the house. Once outside, startled and moved by what he has just experienced, he will falsely confess to having murdered the suicided intruder, taking the blame upon himself. “The act of doing and watching are interchangeable here,” the narrator suggests. “[The] spectacle is arranged to emanate from whoever watches it, where seeing is the first form of doing,” the viewer thus taking the actor’s actions as his own (48). Such purpose seems to be behind several of Marcus’s stories, in that he often attempts to place the reader in a position from which it is difficult to gain a safe distance from the transgressions depicted. Though the forms of the language at times allow a narrow respite, the movement through the language and the rearrangement of the world of each story by the necessarily active reader give him or her a much more consciously role than is usually the case. Such a sense of one’s own participation in and creation of a text potentially ends in the recognition that there is more affinity than we would care to admit between seeing and doing.

     

    Wordplay has often been a mainstay of experimental writers, but Marcus’s linguistic extravangances here work in a way they seldom can in the merely experimental. Marcus’s verbal manipulation is successful because it is not overused and does not exist for its own sake. Indeed, there are no idle experiments here, no manipulations for the sake of trying to prove the author’s cleverness. There is, however, a proliferation of new definitions and redefinitions, and in this we have what seems to be a movement to increased distinction. On the other hand, these definitions often sabotage themselves, and we can find a word so purposefully burdened with meanings that it becomes meaningless. In some of the fictional pieces, this burdening shifts into a destruction of distinction between signifiers. Thus, in “Arm, In Biology,” we find the term arm used in a number of ways — as a physical part of the body, as a percussion instrument, as an element of a machine, and as a medical device — with the definition sliding imperceptibly from one area to another, at once all of them yet none. What is under threat, then, are the rational distinctions made at the base of language — our ability to separate things off from one another through our words. What is gained is a revelatory short-circuiting of language that, in making the connections that rational thought would find invalid, understands the shaping of language to be a passionate affair, vibrant and alive. Moving from satires of scientific classification to the simultaneous lampooning of the fashion industry and historical truth, The Age of Wire and String is an alarming and exacting book which reveals American culture in ways that will always remain hidden to the more conventional “professional disclosers” (3) of the culture.

     

  • It’s Only Rock ‘n’ Roll?

    Jeff Schwartz

    American Culture Studies
    Bowling Green State University
    jeffs@bgsuvax.bgsu.edu

     

     

    Simon Reynolds and Joy Press. The Sex Revolts: Gender, Rebellion, and Rock ‘n’ Roll.Cambridge, MA: Harvard UP, 1995.

     

    The Sex Revolts, which appeared this past spring from Harvard University Press, is unquestionably a major publication in the field of popular music studies. But it is also a deeply troubling one, one which points to significant problems concerning the status of popular music within the academy, and particularly within cultural studies.

     

    Reynolds and Press offer a typology of cultural narratives of gender which dominate rock, mainly the rebel, who must escape the smothering femininity of mother, home, family, committed relationships, etc. for the freedom of the open road, the all-male world of adventure, and the possibility of machine-like autonomy, and the mystic, who seeks reunion with the lost maternal through mysticism, psychedelic drugs, and the embrace of nature (xiv). They conclude by surveying attempts by female artists to negotiate with these dominant narratives. The book is organized in these three sections: Rebel Misogynies, Into the Mystic, and Lift up your Skirt and Speak, and each section proceeds through an exhaustive survey of artists both well-known (The Rolling Sto nes, Led Zeppelin, The Doors, Pink Floyd) and obscure (John’s Children, Radio Birdman, Can).

     

    As the first book devoted entirely to how gender is treated in rock, The Sex Revolts deserves our attention and even our praise. Yet it also calls out for some serious criticism, since it is in some important respects a deeply flawed piece of work. It is my hope that in beginning to excavate these flaws, I will be embarking on the kind of critical engagement with the book that will assure not its undoing but rather the productive unfolding of some of its unrealized potentialities in the coming years.

     

    Essentially the book suffers from three glaring weaknesses. First, although the dust jacket features a Warhol portrait of Mick Jagger with pink lipstick and green eye shadow, promising a decadent, cynical, knowing attitude towards gender performance, Reynolds and Press present a version of rock which is completely heterosexualized. Their examples are chosen to support their theory, not to complicate it. Queer musicians are not featured (a scan of the index reveals no entries for David Bowie, Lou Reed, Tom Robinson, Melissa Etheridge, or Elton John, to pick some prominent names at random), and those male artists who do appear who have made sexual ambiguity part of their persona, such as Jagger, Iggy Pop, Brian Eno, and Kurt Cobain, are treated only with regard to the putatively heterosexual content of their lyrics. Likewise, female artists’ use of sexual ambiguity is read as negotiation with the maculinist dominant narratives of rock, without any possible queer connotations. Such a blindness to the complex performativity of gender and sexuality within rock ‘n’ roll is astonishing, and constitutes a real obstacle to understanding.

     

    The second serious flaw in the book is the authors’ almost exclusive emphasis on lyrics. Reynolds and Press seldom discuss the non-lyrical dimensions of the music, and when they do they resort to vague and highly impressionistic language. Thus, for example, the music of Trobbing Gristle is said to have “mirrored a world of unremitting ugliness, dehumanization, and brutalism. They degraded and mutilated sound, reaching nether-limits that even now have yet to be under-passed” (91). These are perhaps valid things to say about Throbbing Gristle, but they don’t go very far toward explaining what the music actually sounds like or how the sounds can be understood as mirroring such social conditions as “dehumanization.” It is unlikely that a book on film, painting, fiction, or any art form other than popular music could be published by a major academic press if it contained no formal, technical, or semiotic analysis of the medium and texts in question. This is not to say that only musicologists should write about popular music. Given the culturally conservative character of contemporary musicology, this would be a poor idea. But those of us in cultural studies who write about music have an obligation to acquire some familiarity with its mechanics, just as film scholars learn the conventions of camerawork and editing.

     

    The lack of rigor in popular music scholarship is due to the failure of popular music to be accepted in the academy as anything other than a (more or less transparent) social symptom. Courses on topics such as “Rap and African-American Politics” or “Madonna and Postmodern Feminism” are widespread, while those on the formal aspects of popular music or on popular artists as composers and performers are scarce to nonexistent. The basic tools needed for serious analysis of music are monopolized by a musicology which has little interest in popular music or or in the socio-political concerns of cultural studies. This situation has begun to change in the past decade. But the changes have come almost entirely from within musicology, where a new generation of radical musicologists (such as Brett, McClary, and Walser) has been slowly emerging. A corresponding shift within cultural studies has not yet materialized.

     

    With musicology still largely hostile to, and cultural studies still largely incapable of rigorous engagement with, popular musical forms, a kind of semi-scholarship has tended to fill the void. If one runs through the list of university press books on popular music, one finds mostly books written by non-academics or by academics whose primary work is as journalists. The tendency has, I suspect, been exacerbated by university press editors, who, increasingly confronted with a bottom line, are likely to see their popular music titles as a best bet for the coveted crossover market. I do not intend here to marshall a defense of the academic gates against the journalistic barabarians. My point is simply that the particular circumstances of contemporary academe have given the field of popular music studies a somewhat anomalous set of contours — contours whose limitations are evident in the book under review.

     

    To be blunt, The Sex Revolts is not a scholarly book. And while in some respects this is refreshing, it also leads to the third and greatest of the flaws I am enumerating. In their handling of cultural theory — of the range of theoretical materials from which contemporary cultural study draws its assumptions and practices — Reynolds and Press are often clumsy and irresponsible. Names familiar to PMC readers are dropped every few pages: Kristeva, Irigaray, Deleuze and Guattari, Virilio, Theweleit, Sartre, Burroughs, Marinetti, Bataille, Sade, Nietszche, Bachelard, Caillois, Catherine Clement, Marjorie Garber, etc. But there is no evidence that these different and in some cases quite contradictory thinkers have been seriously or systematically engaged. Their names are simply tossed off as the authors string together well-known theoretical catch phrases and brief, striking quotations. The text is no more than garnished with contemporary theory, and this window dressing can’t obscure the fact that Reynolds and Press are basically working with a Jungian myth-symbol criticism that emerged back in the 1960’s. Admittedly, twenty years ago this approach produced Greil Marcus’s masterful Mystery Train, but it also gave us such foolishness as David Dalton’s study of James Dean (wherein Dean is Osiris) or, more recently, Danny Sugerman’s tedious book on Guns ‘n’ Roses (Axl Rose is a shaman) — not to mention the works of Camille Paglia.

     

    Paglia, in fact, is one of the more frequently cited theorists in The Sex Revolts, along with Robert Bly and Joseph Campbell. And the habitual recurrence to these three, whose work is more or less compatible with the pseudo-Jungian approach of Reynolds and Press, leads to their unlikely — not to say hilarious — combination with other cultural theorists whose work is conspicuously incompatible with such an approach. Bly, for example, is yoked together with the brilliant theorist and historian of the Nazi imaginary, Klaus Theweleit; Paglia is paired variously with Sartre, Kristeva, and Ferenczi (85-86).

     

    As I said, it is not a scholarly book. And yet it is one that I think will be genuinely valuable to scholars in a field which offers so few points of productive departure. The Sex Revolts has the great advantage over other works in the field that it at least poses some of the important questions, and gestures, however haphazardly, toward some of the theoretical tools that could be used to answer these questions. Even a conceptually bizarre combination like Bly/Theweleit might lead to a worthwhile mutual interrogation once it is unpacked from Reynolds and Press’s rather artless framework and taken up by someone more adept at contemporary cultural and political theory. For all its faults, The Sex Revolts succeeds in suggesting some of the productive directions that an as-yet barely emergent, more rigorous and thoroughgoing cultural study of popular music might take.

    Works Cited

     

    • Brett, Philip. Elizabeth Wood, and Gary C. Thomas, eds. Queering the Pitch: The New Lesbian and Gay Musicology. New York: Routledge, 1994.
    • Dalton, David. James Dean: The Mutant King. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1974.
    • Marcus, Greil. Mystery Train: Images of America in Rock ‘n’ Roll Music. New York: Plume, 1975.
    • McClary, Susan. Feminine Endings: Music, Gender, and Sexuality. Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1991.
    • Sugerman, Danny. Appetite for Destruction: The Days of Guns N’ Roses. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1991.
    • Walser, Robert. Running with the Devil: Power, Gender, and Madness in Heavy Metal Music. Havover, NH: Wesleyan UP, 1993.

     

  • The First Amendment in an Age of Electronic Reproduction

    Daniel Barbiero

    barbiero@enigma.com

     

    Ronald K.L. Collins and David Skover. The Death of Discourse.Boulder, CO: Westview Press, 1995.

     

    What, in an age of electronic mass communication, is the status of the First Amendment? Specifically, what is or should be the scope of First Amendment protection, given the seeming ubiquity electronic dissemination has afforded commercial speech and entertainment? Ronald Collins and David Skover raise and explore just such questions in their book, which examines the contemporary culture of free expression in the overlapping contexts of popular culture and commercial discourses.

     

    (In the interests of full disclosure, I should mention here that I know Collins and Skover and have discussed some of these issues with them in connection with the articles — subsequently and substantially rewritten — on which this book is based. I am acknowledged in the book for my part in these informal dialogues.)

     

    I

     

    Collins and Skover contend that there are operating at present two cultures of expression. The first, roughly corresponding to the political and intellectual elites, is that of discourse, while the second, roughly corresponding to mass cultures, is t hat of “the new free speech.” By their definition, “discourse” is speech resounding “with reason, with method, with purpose” (ii), while the new free speech consists in the “vernacular of the popular culture . . . in the service of self-gratification” (i i). Although the deliberative discourse of the elites has traditionally been afforded full First Amendment protection, this same protection has been increasingly granted to other forms of expression, thus creating a “wide gulf” separating the kind of (ve rnacular) expression now meriting protection from the deliberative speech the First Amendment was designed to protect (iii). Given this situation, the authors ask, “can the high values of free expression be squared with the dominant character of mass com munication in our popular culture?” (vi).

     

    Collins and Skover’s answer to this question is set out over the course of the book’s three main sections. In the first, they describe what they take to be the general problem created by contemporary First Amendment interpretation, while in the other two they look at the specific issues involved in determining the constitutional status of commercial speech and pornography.

     

    In the first section, the authors describe the defining problem of First Amendment interpretation as a “paratrooper’s paradox.” The image of the paratrooper is meant to convey the notion of one parachuting “into a territory hostile to old notions of free speech” (2). And the “paratrooper’s paradox” consists in the difficulty of reconciling a provision created to protect discursive speech from government tyranny with a culture accustomed to invoking that protection for even the most trivial forms of expression.

     

    The second section is devoted to an examination of the constitutional status of commercial speech. The argument is that modern, image-based advertisers demand constitutional protection by claiming association with the information-based advertising ch aracteristic of a previous era (84). And yet, the authors hold, it is just such image-based advertising that, far from furthering the original goals of the First Amendment, is threatening to turn “America’s marketplace of ideas . . . [into] a junkyard of commodity ideology” (64).

     

    In the third section, the authors examine the debate over whether or not full constitutional protections should apply to expression with an exclusively, or almost exclusively, sexual content. Collins and Skover choose pornography not only as a First Amendment test case, but also as the symbolic epitome of a debased culture of expression. To this end, they construct a fantasy anti-utopia they call “Pornutopia,” which is presented as the logical culmination of the intersection of commercialism, the el ectronic mass media, and indiscriminate First Amendment protection. Although the authors point out that such a state “is not quite America as we now know it” (117, emphasis in the original), they wish to offer a hypothetical object lesson i n what happens when expressive freedoms create an atmosphere in which discourse is degraded, electronic technologies are put at the service of profit and pleasure (130), and “private passion overrides public reason as the key rationale for constitu tional protection of expression” (127, emphasis in the original).

     

    What the authors wish to establish overall is that in a mass culture saturated with television and advertising, the effective exercise of First Amendment rights is threatened more by what they call the “Huxleyan” scenario than by an “Orwellian” scenar io. While the Orwellian scenario is the familiar one of State suppression of speech,the Huxleyan scenario involves the relatively novel danger of the trivialization of (serious) speech through a “tyranny of pleasure” (5). Though not discounting the pote ntial danger to free expression posed by State intervention, the authors assert that within the context of contemporary First Amendment culture, “the Orwellian evil is not likely to pose a clear and present danger to traditional First Amendment values” (2 1).

     

    For Collins and Skover, the Orwellian-Huxleyan dichotomy is the key to understanding the current debate over First Amendment protections (29), and, they note, this dichotomy does not admit neat solutions along traditional ideological lines (22). In o rder to show this, the authors outline three potential scenarios in which the First Amendment and contemporary reality might be made to square (22-28). These are the Classical, the Modern, and the Reformist. In the Classical scenario, various forms of e xpression may be regulated in the interests of protecting deliberative discourse. In the Modernist scenario, fears of State repression of expression — the Orwellian problem — lead to a laissez-faire approach in which all forms of expression are protect ed. The Reformist scenario is a sort of compromise attempt to provide the greatest latitude for expression while still promoting deliberative values. Which do they prefer?

     

    Given the logic of their argument, and their evident distaste for consumer culture and commercial speech, one would expect them to declare that discursive expression alone is deserving of protection, and that either the Classical or Reformist position would set things right. But they do not. Instead, they assert that if we wish to preserve a culture of expression in which Orwellian dangers are minimized, then neither of these two positions will work. Attempting to put either into force would result in a situation they describe as destroying the First Amendment in order to save it (168) — that is, imposing potentially tyrannical restrictions on expression in order to promote only the “high-value” deliberative discourse appropriate to the serious di scussion of weighty issues. At the same time, though, they appear ambivalent toward the Modern position which, while significantly expanding the scope of First Amendment protection, has brought about the “death of discourse.”

     

    Rather than choosing from among these three alternatives, Collins and Skover call for a “bottom-up,” “cultural approach” (iv) that would recognize that First Amendment principles are as much a function of what people actually do with expression as the y are a function of what elites say those principles should be (177). Adopting the cultural approach means rejecting what they call the “deliberate lie”: that protecting trivial expression will foster deliberation and rational discourse (169). They conc lude that “once we confront the reality of First Amendment hypocrisy, we will no longer wish to perpetuate it” (177).

     

    II

     

    Although Collins and Skover call for a bottom-up analysis that would by necessity be rooted in the actual expressive habits and inclinations of mass culture, they clearly display a distrust of certain aspects of that culture. In this respect their bo ok continues a well-established tradition, as an overview of postwar critiques of mass culture readily reveals (e.g. Bulik; Jay, chapter 6). In their alarm over mass culture’s threat to critical thinking one hears echoes of Fromm (Fromm 277); in their ac cusation that advertising debases language and stunts thought, one hears echoes of Marcuse (Marcuse 95). And like that of some of these earlier critics of mass culture, Collins and Skover’s perspective is informed, though by no means wholly determined, b y a mandarin outlook. Such an outlook is made explicit when they state that “if the Philistines have invaded America’s culture, it is not because television forced open the gates of the popular mind. Rather . . . it has everything to do with the nature of popular democracy” (18).

     

    But although they take the mandarin position in regard to the content of contemporary media culture, their cultural approach allows them to take a more sympathetic position on the forms associated with that culture, some of which they wish to incorpor ate into their work. In an attempt to recreate in a print medium some of the features of a computer environment, the authors punctuate their text with icons, table windows, and dialogue boxes; citations are to popular songs as well as to the more traditi onal books and articles. In an afterword about the book, the authors even claim that the book is “interactive and multi-media” — but by interactive they simply mean that they intend the reader to attempt to develop his or her own answers to the problems they pose. (It would not be too far off the mark, in fact, to see the entire book as a full-length exercise in devil’s advocacy.) The multi-media aspect is a bit more complicated. Though it mostly consists in the citations to non-print sources, it inc ludes the construction of “virtual dialogues” at the end of each of the book’s three sections. What the authors have done is to quote letters they solicited from or conference discussions they held with their colleagues, and assemble them to appear as if they have been transcribed from a real-time discussion involving all the participants. The effect is reminiscent of the digitally manipulated images one frequently runs across in cyberspace — convincing records of events that never actually took place.

     

    The authors’ borrowings from the culture(s) at large are not limited to these cyber-conventions, however. For they adopt something of the hyperbolic tone of commercial culture as well. In fact it is in this atmosphere of hyperbole that the book’s ma in weakness lies. Partly this is the result of the authors’ predeliction for sweeping generalizations, which frequently are asserted rather than argued. In other instances, available evidence bearing on a claim may be treated selectively. In making cla ims for the cognitive and behavioral effects of television, for example, the authors admit that studies attempting to establish just such effects are “indeterminate” (19); their response is to dismiss these studies and appeal instead to a series of hypoth etical assertions that they claim are supported by “ample experiential evidence” (19), none of which is given.

     

    In fact, the book’s hyperbole threatens to cross over into jeremiad. For although Collins and Skover explicitly disavow adherence to a “hell-in-a-handbasket” viewpoint, their rhetoric frequently creates the opposite impression. During a virtual dial ogue in which they deny precisely this charge, they remind their critic that “the commercial culture appears low only from the lofty place of traditional First Amendment values. In one important sense, low or lofty is of no moment to us” (106). Perhaps not, but they spend much of the book describing a crisis in which the low threatens to overwhelm the lofty. They speak of an “electronic commonwealth [that] belittles the American mind by degrading discourse” (15); they entitle one section of their analy sis “The Decline of Citizen Democracy and the Rise of Consumer Democracy” (77); they predict that, should entertainment culture continue in its current course, “deliberative discourse dies and is reincarnated as image-driven onanism” (117); and they warn of the “high ideals of Madisonian discourse” being “invoked to protect the low practices of mass communication” (176-7). The authors’ rhetoric of decline recalls the kind of critique Nicholas Zurbrugg has characterized as consisting in a reductive, “apoc alyptic fallacy” (Zurbrugg 5). Drawing on the work of John Cage, Zurbrugg shows that the postmodern situation need not be interpreted apocalyptically, that one can find in postmodern technologies of communication and reproduction the potential for new an d fruitful modes of representation and conceptualization (8-9). Though Zurbrugg perhaps carries his optimism too far, he is surely right to reject the posture of apocalyptic hand-wringing. And indeed, when pressed, Collins and Skover admit the justice o f such a critique (e.g., 19). The trouble is that, having made this concession, they immediately return to their rhetoric of catastrophic decline.

     

    Indeed, the author’s reliance on the rhetoric of decline threatens to undermine their conclusion. For in the end it is difficult to reconcile their denunciation of contemporary culture as a “debauched dystopia” (177) with their hope that a cultural a pproach to First Amendment rights will have a salutary effect on the exercise of those rights. Confronting and refuting expressive hypocrisy calls for a particularly active intellectual engagement; but it is exactly this, they have been arguing, that has been all but washed away in flood of entertainment-induced passivity. Thus it would seem we can either accept at face value their description of the utter degradation of contemporary expression, or we can accept the prescriptive program of unmasking imp licit in their cultural approach — but not both, since the former would seem to preclude the latter.

     

    III

     

    It may be best to see this book as an elaborate thought experiment designed to illuminate a real problem but worked out through various hypothetical conditions and extreme or hyperbolic gambits (the first of which is the “paratrooper’s paradox” itself ).1 Even if we reject the terms of Collins and Skover’s analysis, we may agree that they have identified a problem of real moment in American culture — the problem of effectively maintaining a First Amendment whose interpretation has long been intractably bifurcated.

     

    The bifurcation in First Amendment interpretation consists in the distinction between high-value speech, which is deemed worthy of full protection, and low-value speech, which is not. Speech with political intent or content is uncontroversially consi dered high-value speech, even if the attribution of political intent and content may in particular cases be controversial. Other types of speech — commercial speech, for example — are considered low-value, and historically have not been accorded full F irst Amendment protections. This bifurcation of expression on the basis of political intent and content is a function of Madisonian standards. What happens, though, when Madisonian standards are superseded in a broadened interpretation of First Amendmen t protection?

     

    The question is not idle, since it might be argued that the Madisonian standard has largely been replaced in actual practice by the standard of self-realization. The principle of self-realization, which holds that individuals should be allowed to cul tivate themselves in order to attain a state of total personhood (however defined), would expand First Amendment protections on the assumption that allowing the broadest possible scope of expression will promote the democratic goal of allowing the greates t number of people to realize themselves. And in fact this principle can be seen to be at least implicit in First Amendment interpretation since the 1950’s, particularly as embodied in the opinions of Supreme Court Justices William O. Douglas and Hugo Bl ack. As Cass Sunstein shows, Douglas and Black did much to push First Amendment intepretation toward an “absolutist” position (Sunstein 4-7) compatible with distributing protection on the grounds of self-realization.

     

    But such grounds are not always self-evident. Collins and Skover illustrate this in a virtual dialogue on the problem of determining the status of sexually-explicit expression (154-9). Determining high-value expression (in this case, art) from low-v alue expression (in this case, obscenity) is in and of itself difficult — internal or content-based standards, for instance, have a tendency to be murky and often seemingly arbitrary. But as the authors and their virtual debate partners show, it is also true that the application of the self-realization standard — i.e., that a given work is not obscene (that it is art and therefore has redeeming value) because it contributes to self-realization and thus furthers democratic principles — is itself highly elastic and perhaps ultimately no less arbitrary than the evaluation of the work’s internal features.

     

    What strikes the authors as noteworthy is that, even when the self-realization standard is used, there may still be a discrepancy between the ideals invoked by defenders of freer free expression, and the value of the expression thus protected. The au thors explain this discrepancy by maintaining that despite the explicit invocation of the self-realization principle (when in fact it is explicitly invoked), the de facto principle behind much current extension of First Amendment protection is that of sel f-gratification. They conclude that defenders of the modern First Amendment have found themselves having to “cloak the self-gratification principle in the garb of something more ennobling” (43).

     

    It is this that is behind the authors’ prescription that we become more honest in acknowledging the true motivations behind the current distribution of First Amendment protection. Such honesty would, presumably, go far toward ending what the authors see as the hypocrisy of those invoking the principle of self-realization in order to justify expression that is in fact geared toward self-gratification.

     

    Truly taking the “cultural approach” seriously, it seems to me, would entail going further and recognizing that the distinction between self-realization and self-gratification is itself an unsteady one. Much like the distinction between “true” needs and those that are, to paraphrase Fred Dretske’s expression, cognitively derived desires (Dretske 128-9), the distinction between self-realization and self-gratification may simply be the distinction between two points at different locations on a spectrum .2 If this is so, then it may be that the most honest approach would be to acknowledge that self-gratification may indeed be a contributing factor toward self-realization. Would this bring on the apocalypse? Some no doubt will think so. But it very well may be that encouraging the greatest range of deliberation means tolerating a corresponding diversity in the relative values of expression produced.

    Notes

     

    1. Two assumptions seem to be required to accept the “paratrooper’s paradox.” One must first assume an absolutist interpretation of the First Amendment in which “mass advertising’s pap . . . [is elevated] to the level of fundamental discourse” (113), and then assume that any situation in which this is not the case represents intolerably tyrannical regulation. The first assumption does not describe an actual situation — as evidenced by, e.g., the prohibition of televisio n advertising for hard liquor and cigarettes — and the second does not seem inevitable.

     

    2. It is worth recalling the rationale behind the 1952 Supreme Court decision extending full protections to motion pictures. As Justice Tom Clark wrote, “The line between . . . informing and entertaining is . . . elusive ” (De Grazia 619).

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Bulik, LouAnne. Mass Culture Criticism and Dissent. Bern: Peter Lang, 1993.
    • De Grazia, Edward. Girls Lean Back Everywhere: The Law of Obscenity and the Assault on Genius. New York: Random House, 1992.
    • Dretske, Fred. Explaining Behavior: Reasons in a World of Causes. Cambridge: MIT, 1988.
    • Fromm, Erich. Escape from Freedom. New York: Avon, 1969.
    • Jay, Martin. The Dialectical Imagination: A History of the Frankfurt School and the Institute of Social Research, 1923-1950. Boston: Little Brown, 1973.
    • Marcuse, Herbert. One Dimensional Man. Boston: Beacon, 1964.
    • Sunstein, Cass. Democracy and the Problem of Free Speech. New York: The Free Press, 1995.
    • Zurbrugg, Nicholas. The Parameters of Postmodernism. Carbondale: Southern Illinois UP, 1993.

     

  • Theorizing Public/Pedagogic Space: Richard Serra’s Critique of Private Property

    Minette Estevez

    Hofstra University
    engmam@hofstra.edu

     

     

    Richard Serra. Writings/Interviews. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1994.

     

    If artifacts do not accord with the consumerist ideology, if they do not submit to exploitation and marketing strategies, they are threatened or committed to oblivion.

     

    — Richard Serra

     

    Writings/Interviews, a collection which spans the 60’s through the early 90’s, makes clear the depth of Richard Serra’s commitment to art as a critical intervention, as an inquiry into the social contradictions that unfold in the dominant discourse. Though his politics are most concretely visible in those essays and interviews detailing the battle over Tilted Arc, this volume demonstrates that Serra’s grasp of the repressive nature of bourgeois aesthetics has always been a major component of his work. While his earlier minimalist and process art practices were specifically directed toward the commodification of art and “creativity,” his recent encounters with the legalities of intellectual property rights has succinctly focused his work on the politics of public space. This places Serra’s work within some of the most contested of discursive spaces. Given the current world-wide efforts at the reprivatization, the concept of “public” itself has become one of the most densely layered sites upon which the superstructure of a new world order is being erected.

     

    The continuing controversy surrounding the U.S. government’s destruction of Serra’s sculpture Tilted Arc has made it one of the most publicly visible of contemporary battles over intellectual property law. Though Serra’s contract, like most contracts for public art work, sought to guarantee the sculpture’s maintenance in the site it was commissioned for, the government was able to break the contract, moving, and subsequently destroying, the work. Serra argued that the government’s actions were a violation of “free artistic expression, but the final court ruling held that any rights of artistic “free speech” were not violated since as owner, the government also owned the “speech” of the art work. Property rights take precedence. As Serra learned, “the right to property supersedes all other rights: the right to freedom of speech, the right to freedom of expression, the right to protection of one’s creative work.”(215)

     

    What lends the work of artists like Serra their particular political resonance, a resonance that goes beyond the mere affirmation of “free expression,” is that they do not abandon the institutional spaces of artistic practice — the conceptual apparatus of “high art” as well as its museums and galleries — for a supposedly unmediated contact with their audience. Thus, such work begins from an implicitly materialist assumption about the institutional structuring of experience. In this way it makes possible the important argument that institutional spaces cannot simply be abandoned but must be worked with and transformed. These concerns are spelled out in Serra’s earlier writing and interviews, such as the 1980 interview with Douglas Crimp in which Serra highlights the importance of context in thinking through the potential of any public sculpture. “There is no neutral site,” he remarks. “Every context has its frame and its ideological overtones” (127). For Serra, then, one of the functions of any public art should be to make those “ideological overtones” visible and accessible to an audience. Public space thus becomes a pedagogical space where citizens can become students of, in the words of Serra’s contemporary Robert Smithson, “cultural confinement.”

     

    Serra rightly links the attack on Tilted Arc to a larger conservative agenda. In his essay “Art and Censorship,” he details the effort of politicians like Pat Buchanan and Jesse Helms to conduct a “cultural war.” It is important to recognize the extraordinary ideological mileage conservatives have gotten out of recent “arts” crises. The battles over the NEA are only one of the domestic sites touched by multinational capitalism’s reprivatization efforts. But the NEA struggle is functioning as an exemplary test-site for the dismantling of public institutions and the ideological remaking of notions of “the public” generally necessary for the creation of a post-Cold War ideology. With the collapse of communism, the evil threat from “outside,” new enemies must be manufactured to legitimate a “new” political agenda. Reprivatization is being sold as a “moral” or “democratic” attack on stifling and oppressive bureaucracy, with the “beneficiaries” of bureaucracy pictured as the “real” oppressors of society: welfare queens, incompetent blacks, arrogant elitist artists, and other perverts who undemocratically demand “special treatment.” Through the creation of this cast of “outsiders from within,” defending the public becomes the pretext for an all-out evacuation of the public sphere.

     

    Serra also examines how this agenda is underwritten in the work of art critic Hilton Kramer. Kramer justifies highly-stratified hierarchical social relations through a defense of “the aesthetic”: those epistemological categories which have historically provided one of the most powerful guarantees of bourgeois property relations. In his attacks on Serra, Kramer is not defending the universal rights of individuals, but is instead defending the rights of bourgeois governments and institutions to suspend individual rights at whim, and the legitimation of such suspension of rights through appeals to the “public” and the “common man.” The struggle over Tilted Arc was not the struggle of “the little people” against an “authoritarian” artist, as it has been represented by Hilton Kramer, Donald Kuspit, and then District Attorney Rudolf Giuliani. It was in fact a struggle over the responsibility of powerful institutions, like the United States government, to live up to their contractual obligations, and the rights of “little people” to dispute and redress ontractual violations. It was also a struggle over public space: a struggle over what interests are represented by the uses these spaces are put to, in fact, a struggle over what “public” means, who the “public” is.

     

    That Hilton Kramer should seem to be a defender of “the average joe” is more than a little bizarre since in all his work he assiduously strives to stave off the barbarian hordes from the sacred portals of High Art. However, Kramer’s faux populism in the case of Titled Arc is not so strange considering the kind of adversary Serra is for Kramer. The reason Serra’s work is so threatening to the position represented by Kramer, is that it contests the notion of a “pure” aesthetics, one where art has no necessary connection to anything else in the world except self-reflexive aesthetic categories: form, space, weight, etc. From this vantage Minimalist sculpture would seem to embody the essence of “art” itself. But “Minimalism” is not the idealized category that bourgeois criticism would wish; in fact, in order to represent Minimalism in this fashion the history of its development must be suppressed. And no figure more aggressively gives the lie to a “pure” minimalism than that most political of Minimalists, Richard Serra. In fact no other contemporary American sculptor has so consistently and relentlessly challenged not only traditional notions of pure art, but also traditional notions of political art — that politics amount to a “content” held in an aesthetic container.

     

    The theoretical category of the aesthetic defended by bourgeois critics emerged with the historical transition to a capitalist mode of production. It is a by-product of the processes by which cultural production becomes “autonomous” — severed from earlier social functions. As autonomous artifacts, art objects can be incorporated into the marketplace as commodities. This idealization of the autonomous or “self-reflexive” art object suppresses an understanding of its materiality, its production through historically specific labor relations, and instead glorifies it as an individuated, self-contained “thing.” Art derives its value then from its status as a commodity: a singular and precious item that can be sold, bought and owned. The notion of “autonomy” this brand of aesthetics protects is necessary to the rationalization of bourgeois property relations as it regards the idealization of the commodity as a natural, ontological condition of existence. From this perspective, ideas and objects naturally belong to the separate and discrete cultural domains they have been historically “found” in. Thus a critic like Kramer can insist on the absolute restriction of things and ideas to their proper realm — art can be divided from politics, morals from business, and so forth.

     

    Serra’s art practices have always resisted the epistemological and political divisions that lie behind these aesthetic categories. His early process art pieces, such as splashed lead sculptures, challenged the collectibility of the art object and the market and patronage system which demands art’s availability as private property. His site-specific sculpture also resist the notion of art as exchangeable objects; they are designed to exist as art objects only in one place, incorporating as artistic elements all aspects of the site of their installation, from the formal to the social, historical, and political. The interdependence of work and site in site-specific work forces connections between the formal and the political to the surface and makes difficult the re-separation of these categories attempted by art critics such as Hilton Kramer and Rudolf Giuliani. In capitalist society what makes art “art” is its status as private property, its capacity to be owned. So it comes as no surprise that in bourgeois law, property rights, defined as the rights of owners, are more important than the rights of producers. And the copyright laws derived from this understanding of “property” don’t just limit the circulation of ideas, they place the ownership and control of ideas in particular hands, they render intellectual property the private property of certain classes, and so are inimical to the free access of all individuals.

     

    The current ideological reworking of “private” and “public” achieved through the alignment of conceptuality with authoritarian domination, while representing itself as a progressive “protection” of “individuals” and “individuality,” in fact, quite neatly corresponds to the global restructuring of public institutions under the pressures of privatization necessitated by the late capitalist crisis in productivity. Far from offering some space beyond and therefore resistant to the encroachment of power, such constructions of the “inviolability” of the self and the “interiority” of public space are in fact necessary to their inscription within a transnational political economy which requires not the abolition of existing transpersonal boundaries but rather their reworking — the category of the autonomous subject and its position within a single world order is rendered more flexible, but still intact. What is being defended is bourgeois privacy, a space beyond the limits of the public inquiry and contestation. This makes a political rereading of the controversy surrounding Tilted Arc all the more urgent since it has become a standard touchstone in debates over “the public.” For example, Tilted Arc is the central art work discussed in Critical Inquiry‘s special issue on public art. Virtually all the articles accept the “official” version of the controversy, that is, the version of conservative officials. By unquestioningly accepting those terms of the discussion, the participants leave unchallenged the theoretical concepts which structure conservative discourse on art, most importantly the concept of “the public.” Thus, in his essay, W.J.T. Mitchell, who would undoubtedly not represent himself as a conservative of any sort, ends up pretty much subscribing to the same understanding of reality as Jesse Helms. Mitchell can make such statements as the public is “fed up” with “tolerating symbolic violence against religious and sexual taboos,” and talk about “the public, in so far as it is embodied by state power and public opinion,” without asking how the public may be considered embodied by such things or without considering other publics — the public of intellectuals, artists, blacks, gays who are “fed up” with tolerating the real violence of exploitation and oppression.

     

    In a similar vein, John Hallmark Neff uses Tilted Arc as evidence that public art has “failed” because of the absence of shared beliefs and common interests between artists and the public. In his essay art is imagined as little more than the icing on the cake of consensus, and unsurprisingly, “difficult” or “avant garde” art is dismissed as elitist. That difficulty and rigor are not essentially elitist is beyond Neff, who never bothers to ask whether it might not be more elitist to contend that the “common man” cannot handle rigor and difficulty than to give him the opportunity to do so. And in Michael North’s essay the work of Vito Acconci is smeared as authoritarian. In Acconci’s work Fan City, viewers participate by unfolding banners printed with slogans, “so the viewer is made to wave the flag of a faith he or she may not share . . . the viewer is in fact entirely helpless in the hands of the sculptor.” Setting aside his conflation of sculpture and sculptor, North seems to believe that the temporarily uncomfortable awareness of oppressive structures of power which works like Fan City and Tilted Arc encourage is somehow commensurable with the relentless economic and political helplessness many Americans are subjected to constantly. Mitchell and North, and possibly Neff, would all see themselves as opposite numbers to Hilton Kramer, yet it is striking that “aesthetics” allows them a ground on which to agree: democracy is a formal assemblage of free individuals and their “feelings,” rather than the particular organization of institutions which limit or allow public access to the resources which create and satisfy those feelings and desires.

     

    The discrediting of artistic practices like Serra’s is ultimately not just an issue for the art world. The prohibition of avant-garde practice found in traditional arguments as well as in postmodern ones is connected to a dismantling of systemic critique and revolutionary opposition currently sought by both conventional conservative forces and by postmodern neo-liberalism. What is specifically under attack here is the notion of “public” as a pedagogic space. The “difficulty” of work like Serra’s comes from its challenging of “simple” and common sense modes of understanding “art” and its relation to anything else — in other words from the work’s ability to transform subjectivity, to serve a criti(que)al pedagogic unction. A criti(que)al pedagogy requires a self-distancing from its object, from the common sense, from “the common man,” and all other conventional understandings of a common public, precisely in order to interrogate and transform those conceptual series. In this regard criti(que)al pedagogy contests liberal humanist notions of the public as simply an extension of private individuals — a space where people get together to take care of interests they have in common, a space to mediate conflict and make sure that nobody transgresses the private boundaries of anyone else. Criti(que)al pedagogy argues instead for a notion of public space which doesn’t rest content with a basis in the private individual. It wants instead to transform private subjectivity in order to produce a public individual — one who is interested in enabling the transformation of the global distribution of resources and capable of setting into motion collective modes of institutional organization.

     

    An unexamined humanism explains the hostility to avant-gardism, or indeed to any art which is not immediately accessible to everyone at the same time and in the same way. Such a standpoint assumes that art works and other texts have direct and immediately appreciable politics “in” them as opposed to producing their meaning in their various uses within concrete contexts. Theories of the empirical immanence of meaning correspond to and reinforce the “interiority” of the liberal public space and the homogeneity of the private individuals who constitute it. In both cases criti(que)al pedagogy appears to come from “outside,” and seems apocalyptically threatening. And in a sense it is, since criti(que)al pedagogy is an attempt to exacerbate the very contradictions which the “inside” attempts to suppress. The political effect of this suppression, however, is to exorcise from the community any rigorous consideration of its social content, of the purposes or uses that it does or might serve. Given this set of circumstances, a criti(que)al pedagogic practice, in “art” or any other social space, must place a critique of institutionality at the center of its practices; a critique which does not imagine that one can abolish public/collective institutional effects and “free” the private and individual.

     

    In other words, far from being an alien intrusion from “outside,” as radical strategies are commonly understood (i.e., Serra is “forcing” a restrictive art work on the “free” movement of the public), the resources for revolutionary opposition are also produced by those institutional contradictions, between forces of production and social relations which in Marx’s words comprise “two different sides of the development of the social individual. [They] appear to capital as mere means . . . for it to produce on its limited foundation. In fact, however, they are the material conditions to blow this foundation sky-high.” The interiority of the individual subject, then, is no more than the position of this subject within the interior of capital. A criti(que)al pedagogy brings the cultural “outside” (in all its vanguard and avant-garde forms) to bear on the “inside” in order to disrupt the formation of subjects as interior forces of production and force the possibilities for collective transformation. In this sense it is truly a practice of public pedagogy. Throughout this volume, and of course in all his work, Serra argues for an understanding of the artist as cultural critic, a stance which may seem “old-fashioned,” but still flies in the face of business as usual in a time when, as Serra puts it, “criticism in the United States has become for the most part a promotional exercise, a pseudoadvertisement to enhance sales” (226).

     

  • Biding Spectacular Time

    A.H.S. Boy

    spud@nothingness.org

     

    “Guy Debord.” The Society of the Spectacle.trans. Donald Nicholson-Smith. New York: Zone Books, 1994.

     

    Numbers between brackets refer to numbered theses in the book.

     
    For decades, Guy Debord’s The Society of the Spectacle was only available in English in a so-called “pirate” edition published by Black & Red, and its informative — perhaps essential — critique of modern society languished in the sort of obscurity familiar to political radicals and the avant-garde. Originally published in France in 1967, it rarely receives more than passing mention in some of the fields most heavily influenced by its ideas — media studies, social theory, economics, and political science. A new translation by Donald Nicholson-Smith issued by Zone Books last year, however, may finally bring about some well-deserved recognition to the recently-deceased Debord. Society of the Spectacle has been called “the Capital of the new generation,” and the comparison bears investigation. Debord’s intention was to provide a comprehensive critique of the social and political manifestations of modern forms of production, and the analysis he offered in 1967 is as authoritative now as it was then.

     

    Comprised of nine chapters broken into a total of 221 theses, Society of the Spectacle tends toward the succinct in its proclamations, favoring polemically poetic ambiguities over the vacuous detail of purely analytical discourse. There is, however, no shortage of justification for its radical claims. Hegel finds his place, Marx finds acclaim and criticism, Lenin and Rosa Luxemburg add their contributions, and Debord’s own insights are convincingly argued. It becomes evident quite quickly that Debord has done his homework — Society of the Spectacle is no art manifesto in need of historical or theoretical basis. Debord’s provocations are supported where others would have failed. The first chapter, “Separation Perfected,” contains the fundamental assertions on which much of Debord’s influence rests, and the very first thesis, that

     

    the whole of life of those societies in which modern conditions of production prevail presents itself as an immense accumulation of spectacles. All that was once directly lived has become mere representation.

     

    establishes Debord’s judgment; the rest attempt to explain it, and to elaborate on the need for a practical and revolutionary resistance.

     

    By far Debord’s most famous work, Society of the Spectacle lies somewhere between a provocative manifesto and a scholarly analysis of modern politics. It remains among those books which fall under the rubric of “oft quoted, rarely read” — except that few can even quote from it. A few of the general concepts to be found in Society of the Spectacle, however, have filtered down into near-popular usage. For example, analyses of the Gulf War as “a spectacle” — with the attendant visual implications of representation and the politics of diversion — were commonplace during the conflict. The distorted duplication of reality found in theme parks is typically discussed with reference to its “spectacular nature,” and we are now beginning to see attempts to explain how “cyberspace” fits into the framework of the situationist critique. (Cf. Span magazine, no. 2, published at the University of Toronto.) But this casual bandying about of vaguely situationist notions by journalists and coffee-house radicals masks the real profundity of Debord’s historical analysis. Much more than a condemnation of the increasingly passive reception of political experiences and the role of television in contemporary ideological pursuits, Society of the Spectacle traces the development of the spectacle in all its contradictory glory, demonstrates its need for a sort of parasitic self-replication, and offers a glimpse of what may be the only hope of resistance to the spectacle’s all-consuming power.

     

    Fully appreciating Society of the Spectacle requires a familiarity with the context of Debord’s work. He was a founding member of the Situationist International, a group of social theorists, avant-garde artists and Left Bank intellectuals that arose from the remains of various European art movements. The Situationists and their predecessors built upon the project begun by Futurism, Dada, and Surrealism in the sense that they sought to blur the distinction between art and life, and called for a constant transformation of lived experience. The cohesion and persuasive political analysis brought forth by Debord, however, sets the Situationist International apart from the collective obscurity (if not irrelevance) of previous art movements. Society of the Spectacle represents that aspect of situationist theory that describes precisely how the social order imposed by the contemporary global economy maintains, perpetuates, and expands its influence through the manipulation of representations. No longer relying on force or scientific economics, the status quo of social relations is “mediated by images” [4]. The spectacle is both cause and result of these distinctively modern forms of social organization; it is “a Weltanschauung that has been actualized” [5].

     

    In the same manner that Marx wrote Capital to detail the complex and subtle economic machinations of capitalism, Debord set out to describe the intricacies of its modern incarnation, and the means by which it exerts its totalizing control over lived reality. The spectacle, he argues, is that phase of capitalism which “proclaims the predominance of appearances and asserts that all human life . . . is mere appearance” but which remains, essentially, “a negation of life that has invented a visual form for itself” [10]. In both subject and references, we see Debord tracing a path similar to Marcuse in Counter-Revolution and Revolt, in which Marcuse describes the motives and methods behind capitalism’s “repressive tolerance” and its ability to subsume resistance, maintain power, and give the appearance of improving the quality of everyday living conditions. Debord’s global cultural critique later finds an echo in the work of scholars like Johan Galtung, the Norwegian peace research theorist who established a similarly pervasive analysis of cultural imperialism. It is the situationist focus on the role of appearances and representation, however, that makes its contributions to political understanding both unique and perpetually relevant.

     

    The spectacle is the constantly changing, self-organizing and self-sustaining expression of the modern form of production, the “chief product of present-day society” [15]. An outgrowth of the alienating separation inherent in a capitalist social economy, the spectacle is a massive and complex apparatus which serves both the perpetuation of that separation and the false consciousness necessary to make it palatable — even desirable — to the general population. The bourgeois revolution which brought about the modern state is credited with founding “the sociopolitical basis of the modern spectacle” [87]. The longest chapter of the book, “The Proletariat as Subject and Representation,” follows the development of the modern state in both its free-market and state capitalist forms, and attempts to describe how this development increasingly led to the supersession of real social relations by representations of social relations. Later chapters cover the dissemination of spectacular representations of history, time, environment, and culture. The scope of Debord’s critique is sufficient to demonstrate that the spectacle is more than the brain-numbing flicker of images on the television set. The spectacle is something greater than the electronic devices to which we play the role of passive receptors; it is the totality of manipulations made upon history, time, class — in short, all of reality — that serve to preserve the influence of the spectacle itself. Much like Foucault’s discipline, the spectacle is an autonomous entity, no longer (if ever) serving a master, but an entity which selectively chooses its apparent beneficiaries, for its own ends, and for only as long as it needs them. Consequently, resistance is difficult and the struggle is demanding.

     

    On the one hand, Debord faults Marxists for their rigid ideologizing, their absorption in an archaic understanding of use value, and their faith in the establishment of a socialist state to represent the proletariat. On the other hand, he criticizes the anarchists for their utopian immediatism and their ignorance of the need for a historically grounded transformational stage. Debord’s own offerings in Society of the Spectacle are generally vague, beginning with claims like

     

    Consciousness of desire and the desire for consciousness together and indissolubly constitute that project which in its negative form has as its goal the abolition of classes and the direct possession by the workers of every aspect of their activity. [53]

     

    In the chapter on “Negation and Consumption,” Debord outlines the theoretical approach of the situationists, distinct from that of contemporary sociology, which he claims is “unable to grasp the true nature of its chosen object, because it cannot recognize the critique immanent to that object.” The situationist, according to Debord, understands that critical theory is dialectical, a “style of negation” [204] — and here we find the description of what has become perhaps the most well-known tactic of the situationists, détournement. This strategy, at a theoretical level, is a manifestation of the reversal of established logic, the logic of the spectacle and the relationships it creates. At a practical level, détournement has found its expression in comic strips, whose speech bubbles are replaced by revolutionary slogans; utopian and apparently nonsensical graffiti; and the alteration of billboards. This latter tactic, first introduced in Methods of Détournement (1956), involves the radical subversion of the language — both textual and graphic — of the modern spectacle. In its most common form, it involved taking comic strip speech bubbles or advertising copy and replacing them with revolutionary slogans or poetic witticisms. The point, according to Debord, is “to take effective possession of the community of dialogue, and the playful relationship to time, which the works of the poets and artists have heretofore merely represented” [187]. This “unified theoretical critique,” however, can do nothing without joining forces with “a unified social practice,” and this is where Debord’s scholarship fails him despite its veracity. The situationists were, after all, a group of intellectuals, and not factory workers — a fact which Debord himself did not hesitate to acknowledge. He firmly believed, however, that “that class which is able to effect the dissolution of all classes” was the only hope for a return to real life.

     

    Despite their predominantly intellectual status, however, the Situationist International has had its share of practical influence. One of their members is credited with writing the bulk of On the Poverty of Student Life, the tract published by the students of Strasbourg in 1966 and often cited as a catalyst for the events of May ’68. The Situationists played a role in those events as well, seeing in them the first real possibility of a general strike — a modern Commune — in their time. But it may be Greil Marcus, in his book Lipstick Traces, who has done the most in recent times to promote the visibility of the Situationists. Lipstick Traces follows the history of punk rock back to the tradition of Dada and situationist theory. Both Jamie Reid (creator of much of the graphic “look” of punk) and Malcolm McClaren (self-styled “creator” of the Sex Pistols) acknowledge the influence of the SI on their own work, and the legacy of punk rock may well be the last great youth movement which involved not only a musical revolution, but total social critique (with a soundtrack).

     

    Plagued by constant internal battles (in which Debord, in his best André Breton manner, irrevocably excluded virtually every member over the course of 15 years, in a hail of harsh criticism each time), and so determinedly revolutionary that it alienated most of its potential sympathizers, the SI finally disbanded in 1972. It’s a bit ironic, in this light, that the latest translation of Society of the Spectacle is brought to us by Nicholson-Smith, who was himself excluded from the SI in 1967 along with his colleague Christopher Gray. Together, their translation efforts account for a large part of the major SI texts available in English — an admirable testament to their belief in the significance of situationist theory. This new translation addresses a number of awkward points in earlier translations, but is not without its own inconvenient or clumsy prose. Debord writes in a difficult manner; style is not his strongest point. But Nicholson-Smith sometimes forsakes fidelity in favor of his own sense of consistency and clarity, even when these things were lacking in the original. The result is a bit less awkward, but also a bit less Debord.

     

    When Debord released his Comments on Society of the Spectacle nearly 20 years after the original publication, he had several comments to make on the importance of recent events, but virtually no revisions to his original theses. His reflective judgment was not in error. The concise Society of the Spectacle remains an accurate depiction of modern conditions. Debord’s only addition to his original critique was, however, cynical and foreboding. Whereas the spectacle in 1967 took on two basic forms — concentrated and diffuse, corresponding to the Eastern Block and American social structures, respectively — we have now reached the era of the integrated spectacle, which shows less hope and exercises greater control than ever before. The spectacle now pervades all of reality, making every relationship manipulated and every critique spectacular. In this age of Disney, Baudrillard, the total recuperation of radical chic, and the dawn of virtual worlds, we need to familiarize ourselves with the situationist critique. The recent hype surrounding the Internet and the regulation of digital affairs — not to mention the very structure of virtual relationships we are beginning to feel comfortable with — are perfect candidates for evaluation. The speed of life, the pace of the spectacle, is proportional to the speed of computers and communication. True criticism is plodding, historically situated, and unwilling to accept the immediate fix of reformism. The challenge today is to recover the situationist critique from the abyss of the spectacle itself. Debord concluded Society of the Spectacle by stating that “a critique capable of surpassing the spectacle must know how to bide its time” [220]. Not by waiting, but through the unification of theoretical critique and practical struggle of which “the desire for consciousness” is only one element.

     

    NOTE: The Situationist International published their works with an explicit anti-copyright notice which states that the writings may be “freely reproduced, translated, or adapted, without even indicating their origin.” With this in mind, the Situationist International archives were established at http://www.nothingness.org/SI. The reader will find there a number of Debord’s works translated in their entirety, as well as texts in the original French, Situationist graphics, and links to other Situationist-related sites.

     

  • Lacan Looks at Hill and Hears His Name Spoken: An Interpretive Review of Gary Hill through Lacan’s “I’s” and Gazes

    S. Brent Plate

    Institute of the Liberal Arts
    Emory University
    splate@emory.edu

     

     

    Gary Hill. Exhibition at the Guggenheim Museum SoHo. May 11 – August 20. Organized by Chris Bruce, Senior Curator, Henry Art Gallery, Seattle.

     

    [D]esire, alienated, is perpetually reintegrated anew, reprojecting the Idealich outside. It is in this way that desire is verbalised. Here there is a game of see-saw between two inverted relations. The specular relation of the ego, which the subject assumes and realizes, and projection, which is always ready to be renewed, in the Idealich.

     

    -Jacques Lacan1

     

    Gary Hill’s video and installation art challenges a WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) view of perception by showing the mediated nature of the viewing subject’s interaction with the artwork. Hill investigates the relationships between bodies, words, images, and technology. While much of Hill’s work in the past has focused on single-channel videotapes, his recent exhibition at the Guggenheim SoHo (11 May – 20 August) is a display of 13 room-sized installations, artworks within which the viewer’s body must move. Furthermore, by incorporating philosophical and literary texts (e.g., writings of Wittgenstein, Heidegger, Blanchot) into his videos and images, Hill manages to confront the incessant relationship of words and images in a striking ly original way in artistic practice.

     

    Hill’s exhibition spaces are spaces of and about media (sing. medium) in two senses of the word. As the American Heritage Dictionary defines it, a “medium” is, “1. Something . . . that occupies a position or represents a condition midway between extremes. 2. An intervening substance through which something else is transmitted or carried on.” This dual definition makes it possible to consider the term ‘medium’ in aesthetic categories of form and content. Medium as content is “something between.” Medium as form is a “substance through which something else is transmitted.” Hill’s art investigates each sense of the term, and both of them together.

     

    Though essays about Hill are pocked with poststructural references, Hill makes no explicit mention of Lacan in his installations or video works. Yet, Hill and Lacan seem to share affinities for what Lacan calls the “function of seeingness.”2 That is, they each explore the space of mediation between the viewer and the object viewed. This relation is a see-saw game of desire and projection, and is, finally, constitutive of subjectivity.

     

    In the following i take Lacan’s theory of subjectivity and the interrelated notion of “the eye and the gaze” as an orienting point. From there i create a “conversational re-view” of Hill’s recent exhibition. As this exhibition included thirteen installations — each abundantly rich enough in content to summon its own essay — i will concentrate on only three particular installations.

     

    The dense opening quote of Lacan serves as a preface to the following reading of Hill’s installations. Within the quoted passage resides the catalyst that is desire, the notion of projection, and a relation between the registers of the imaginary and the symbolic. In further comparing Hill and Lacan, i suggest that through the registers of the imaginary and the symbolic one of Lacan’s underlying motifs is to reconceive the relation of the word and the image within the realm of subjectivity. While it is clear that Lacan privileges the symbolic over the imaginary (and hence also, the word over the image), they each remain vital in the construction of the subject.

     

    Turning to Lacan’s mediated view of “the function of seeingness,” there is found a distinction between the eye and the gaze. To clarify this distinction, Lacan provides what are perhaps the simplest of his diagrams (91):

     

    (IMAGE)

     

    The first diagram portrays the geometral perspective set up in Renaissance schema (notably that of Alberti) of a singular point-of-view taking in the whole of the other (object) through the eye. As the agent of vision, the subject is the “Cartesian subject, which is itself a sort of geometral point, a point of perspective” (86). As the still point of singular perspective, the subject is affirmed in her or his position. Lacan’s conception is duplicitous in its combining of the simple, now common-sensical notion of perspective with the modern view of the singular and unitary subject.

     

    Entering Hill’s exhibition space, the viewer comes upon a room containing the installation Learning Curve (1993). Here the viewer/subject finds a seat, and the eye is given “something to feed on” (101). Sitting in a chair at a schooldesk, the viewer faces forward (the only way possible) and finds the lines of the edge of her or his desk fanning out a long way away from the chair toward a screen at the far end of the schooldesk. (The desk is approximately 8′ long.) The viewer sits at the “point” of the triangular schooldesk which, due to its size, shifts from being a mere desk to a spatial plane — separating, but also connecting — the seated viewer to the image on the screen. Projected on to the screen from a video projector above the head of the seated viewer is the moving image of a seemingly endless breaking wave. Metaphors of drowning hardly need be mentioned as one quickly becomes captivated by the image of a perfect wave, curling right into infinity.

     

    Learning Curve, 1993

     

    (IMAGE)

     

    Without mention of Lacan, commentator Robert Mittenthal states that, “To sit in Learning Curve is to become part of the piece; one is physically supported by the same object that focuses one’s attention on the pure visual space of the projected wave. The chair forces the viewer into a single-point perspective.”3 The single point of the eye in this installation is matched by the “projection” of the wave. The light is projected from a singular point (the video projector above the head of the seated viewer) and spreads out to the site where the screen is filled by the projected image. Projected lines of light exactly match the lines of the desk, thereby conflating the viewer’s position of seeing with the projector, and with the projected image.

     

    Lacan’s comments on the imaginary realm of projection are fitting here: “Each time the subject apprehends himself as form and as ego, each time that he constitutes himself in his status, in his stature, in his static, his desire is projected outside.”4 In Learning Curve, the subject constitutes her or his self in the static schooldesk, and desire is projected to the screen in front. Desire is desire of a wave, the Idealich, the fluid motion, the amniotic fluids. To be identified with a wave . . . To be there . . . To Be, there. . . .

     

    While the single-point perspective of Learning Curve and of Lacan’s Renaissance diagram entails a position of mastery — where everything flows from the eye/I — slippage is already occurring. The sight of the other (the perfect wave, the imago) enthralls, captivates, and causes the viewing subject to begin to dissolve because the other is finally only the image of the subject her or him self projected onto the other. For a final entry into subjectivity, the other must become more than a screen for a projected image of the subject. The subject must enter a field of visual relations (the symbolic) where she or he is the one seen as well as the one seeing.

     

    Lacan’s theories of subjectivity confound the subject of visual mastery. The single-point perspective corresponds to a singular subject position, and Lacan is out to foil and complicate this notion associated with “modern science.” In so doing, Lacan inverts the first diagram, and the subject is now seen in relation to the gaze (see diagram 2, above). The gaze is a web of which the subject is but one (but not One) piece: “We are beings who are looked at, in the spectacle of the world. . . . [The] gaze circumscribes us” (75). Further inverting the first diagram’s effects, the gaze “is that which turns me into a picture” (105), with light moving in the opposite direction. The point of light is projected from the site of the other (the gaze) on to the subject through a “screen.” The subject is constituted by this pre-existing screen, a pre-existing set of symbols which creates a grid for the other(s) to perceive the subject.

     

    Hill, in a separate but related installation, Learning Curve (Still Point) (1993), likewise inverts the triangle of vision. Now, rather than a large screen opposite the viewer with lines extended out, the viewer sits at the “base” of the triangular desk. The edges of the desk converge at a video monitor at the end of the long desk. The schooldesk and the seat are similar in each installation, only now the image of the wave is displayed in the small form of a 5″ video monitor, making it difficult for the viewer to identify with and be captivated by the image. Furthermore, the light is also reversed. With the first installation (as with Lacan’s first diagram), light is projected from the point of perspective, the “geometral point.” Now the light originates from the far end, from the “point of light” (due to the fact that a video monitor has replaced a video projector). Here the light is projected onto the viewer from the place of the other. The subject/viewer becomes, in essence, “the screen.”

     

    Learning Curve (Still Point), 1993

     

    (IMAGE)

     

    Further comparing Learning Curve (Still Point) to the gaze, Mittenthal, again without reference to Lacan, suggests of Hill’s installation that “one imagines a California schoolboy daydreaming of surfing, suddenly called upon to answer one of his teacher’s queries.”5 The schooldesk becomes the site of “the subject sustaining himself in a function of desire” (85), the desire to be surfing, that is, to be elsewhere. Coextensive with this desire is the element of surprise, and one must wonder why Mittenthal, who neither quotes Lacan nor surfs, brings in the element of surprise in the viewing of these waves rather than the others. Perhaps his imagined response to sitting in this position is tinged with the voyeuristic shame of peering through a keyhole: “the gaze that surprises me and reduces me to shame” (84). This shame brings the viewer out of her or his self (out of the surfing daydream) into the realm of others, and therefore also becomes a realization by the subject of her or his role within the larger symbolic order.

     

    Lacan further complicates the relation of the eye and the gaze by overlapping the first two diagrams, creating a more comprehensive “field of vision.” The eye and the gaze are brought together in a third diagram (106) and placed on opposing sides.

     

    (IMAGE)

     

    Here the viewing subject is not simply either the master of perception (as in the Renaissance schema), or objectified within the gaze. Rather,

     

    Only the subject — the human subject, the subject of the desire that is the essence of man — is not, unlike the animal, entirely caught up in this imaginary capture. He maps himself in it. How? In so far as he isolates the function of the screen and plays with it. Man, in effect, knows how to play with the mask as that beyond which there is the gaze. The screen is here the locus of mediation. (107; emphasis mine)

     

    It is, finally, at the site of the screen — at the point of the medium — that the subject’s identity is negotiated.

     

    In Lacan’s third diagram we are brought back to the relation of the imaginary and the symbolic: “The moment of seeing can intervene here only as a suture, a conjunction of the imaginary and the symbolic” (118). In the register of the imaginary, the subject/viewer projects her or his own imago onto the screen. There the projected imago comes into contact with the other side of the screen, on which is portrayed the image through which the subject is seen by others in the symbolic realm. While the gaze circumscribes the subject, the site of the screen becomes the site where the eye and the gaze meet. Out of this sutured relation, this discourse in the field of the other, this sight in the field of vision, identity springs.

     

    At this point Lacan shifts his oft-quoted “man’s desire is the desire of the Other,” to say “that it is a question of a sort of desire on the part of the Other, at the end of which is the showing (le donner-à-voir)” (115). Lacan makes his final turn against the realm of vision and states that this showing is connected with the desire to see, and that desire is fascination (Latin: “the evil eye”). Too much fascination turns to envy (invidia): “the envy that makes the subject pale before the image of a completeness closed upon itself, before the idea that the petit a, the separated a from which he is hanging, may be for another the possession that gives satisfaction” (116). Here it is the symbolic (and language) which will rescue the subject from the power of annihilating envy. And “where can we better picture this power than in invidia?” (115). And perhaps, where can we better picture Lacan’s notions than in video?

     

    One would have to imagine a continually spinning swivel chair at a schooldesk intersecting Hill’s two installations to relate the overlapping third diagram. But this wouldn’t quite get us to the point (however still). Fortunately, if we move into the next room, we come upon an installation which provides a clearer manifestation of the subject’s relation to vision. The installation places the subject/viewer in the overlapping third diagram of Lacan, but in an even more fluid way than Lacan imagined (or, was able to chart).

     

    This next room is the site of the installation Beacon (Two Versions of the Imaginary) (1990). Beacon is a simple design with complex content. The “beacon” (“a signalling or guiding device; a source of guidance or inspiration”)6 is a piece of aluminum pipe, 6″ in diameter and 54″ in length. The pipe is suspended from the ceiling and comes to rest about 78″ from the floor, just high enough for most people to walk under, yet just low enough to cause many to feel they have to duck to pass under it. Powered by a motor, the beacon spins slowly in a darkened room (approximately 20’x40′) providing all the light for the room. The light which is here provided is given by two 4″ video monitors placed in each end of the pipe. The video image is then projected out by projection lenses which cap the ends of the pipe. (Note that in this set-up the image can be seen two ways, by looking into the pipe — though no one would actually do this – – and by looking at the projected image on the wall.) The beacon spins in a circular motion, and since it is placed off-center in a rectangular room, the projected images vary in size, sometimes filling a good part of a wall, sometimes a small square. Finally, four speakers are placed in the corners of the room, with the sound sometimes “following” the moving images, sometimes not.

     

    The fact that i have used the word “sometimes” four times in the last two sentences suggests that Beacon (Two Versions of the Imaginary) gives a sense of chance. Many of Hill’s works provide for chance, yet this chance springs out of a polished and precise technological medium (even the appearance of the polished aluminum pipe itself gives a “smooth” feel). In Beacon there is a motor, a system, and an array of electronics controlling the piece. Hill arranges the installation to allow the blips in the circuitry (the slips, the elisions) to show through. Even so, it sometimes seems the blips may be intentional, wired into the circuitry, and that may be, but Hill allows an even greater interruption (a much greater inbreaking of the Real in Lacanian terms): the presence of the viewer in the space of the installation. The viewer is not a detached viewer here. The viewer is part of the room, part of the installation, and this interaction creates chance elements beyond the technical apparatus of the piece. Similarly, there is no position from which to take in the entirety of the piece, no place for a singular point-of-view. As the beacon spins, projecting its light onto the walls, viewers are caught in the searching path of light, their silhouettes outlined against the wall for others to see. Hill asks in a short writing on Beacon, “What will you do when you are in the light?”7

     

    And i, as an observer and participant, watched what others did in the light, realizing that i, at the same time, was being watched. When i viewed the installation, there were on average five to ten others in the room at once — so there was a necessary negotiation taking place between bodies and between bodies and the revolving light. Most often people would move aside, attempting to get out of the light for fear of disrupting someone else’s view. The problem was that there were two sides to the beacon and to move out of the light meant an almost continual movement. One could stand directly under the beacon and always remain out of the light (standing at the geometral point, even if it is spinning), but due to the height mentioned above one kept feeling as if the pipe would hit one’s head, which would create an even more intense feeling of being a spectacle. Hence, there were few people who ever did stand close to the pipe. The perpetual escape from the light mixed with the revolving images and the viewer’s desire to see the images meant quite simply that the viewing involved a lot of bodily movement within the space of the installation.

     

    There were others who — either due to an exhibitionist streak, or to a resignation that there was no escaping from the panoptic light — merely remained in their positions and allowed the light to cast their shadows on the wall. But of course, from this bold position there was still no way to see the entirety of the installation; one had to choose which image to look at. And then there were the younger ones who would jump up into the space of the light just to be seen, or would create fun shadows of dogs or butterflies with their hands, wanting to show a part of their selves and have an other take notice.

     

    But let me leave aside the formal nature of the piece and address the content. What sounds are emanating from the speakers? And what exactly are the images being projected onto the walls? A text is being read. Various voices in somber tones recite a text of Maurice Blanchot. Ironically, the “Imaginary” in the title does not refer to Lacan, but to Blanchot’s short essay “Two Versions of the Imaginary.” Likewise, the images often correspond to this text. Sometimes there is an image of the printed essay itself, with the camera (like an eye) following along the pages and lines being spoken. Sometimes there is an image of a person reading the text. Other times there is a still shot of a person as the spoken text continues, leaving the simple view of a face moving across the walls.

     

    Blanchot’s essay is complex and obscure, and i will only point out a few of the more important elements as it relates back to Hill’s video work. “Two Versions of the Imaginary” chiefly concerns the role of the image within language. The image brings forward places and times which are “absent” in the current perception to remake them as somehow present. In other words, linguistic images are a representation. But it is the relation between presence and absence in the image which for Blanchot provides the possibilities of power and fascination.

     

    The essay begins with this enigmatic paragraph (and the quotes i give here are also quotes heard spoken within Hill’s installation):

     

    But what is the image? When there is nothing, that is where the image finds its condition, but disappears into it. The image requires the neutrality and the effacement of the world, it wants everything to return to the indifferent depth where nothing is affirmed, it inclines towards the intimacy of what still continues to exist in the void; its truth lies there. But this truth exceeds it; what makes it possible is the limit where it ceases. Hence its dramatic aspect, the ambiguity it evinces, and the brilliant lie with which it is reproached.8

     

    The image is a two-sided coin (perhaps even an effaced one), or a two-sided screen: showing limits as well as giving the experience of limitlessness. This, i would suggest, is Blanchot’s version of the suture between the Lacanian imaginary and symbolic.

     

    In the subject’s perception, according to Blanchot, to see an event as an image is not to be infinitely removed from the originary thing itself. Rather, “to experience an event as image is not to free oneself of that event . . . it is to let oneself be taken by it . . . to that other region where distance holds us, this distance which is now unliving, unavailable depth, an inappreciable remoteness become in some sense the sovereign and last power of things” (87). Just as a cadaver is typically thought to come “after” the being itself, the image, if all it did were to imitate a “real” thing, would be subordinated as a secondary event. But for Blanchot, contrarily, the image is “not the same thing distanced, but that thing as distancing” (80-81). The perception of the image exists in an in-between place, a mediated site.

     

    Blanchot’s two versions of the imaginary are intertwined and stitched together. One version brings us to Lacan’s imaginary, the site of “universal unity.” The other version, through its emphasis on limits, recalls Lacan’s symbolic: “what makes [the image] possible is the limit where it ceases.” Subjectivity is created through splits and gaps enlisting desire and the need of mediation, a mediation working internally and externally.

     

    Concluding my own stitched together review, i return to the site of Hill’s installation Beacon. The installation is an experience, a passing through (ex-peri: “pass through”), both in the sense that one must cross the room to continue the rest of the exhibition, and in the sense that one passes through a series of mediations while in the room. Among these mediations there is, of course, the need for negotiating space with other bodies in a darkened room. Then there is the negotiation with the revolving light; inevitably, the image is projected onto the viewer’s body for all others to see, the subject is caught in the gaze. Correlatively, the interception of light by the body leaves a dark spot (scotoma; blind spot) on the wall in the midst of the image, leaving others with a fractured, incomplete view. There is also the space of the viewer existing between the two images on opposing walls. While the images originate at the same point (the pipe) they are cast to opposit e ends of the room. From there the two images develop a relationship with each other — there are times when the book is shown on one wall while the person reading is imaged on the other wall — and, as Hill states, “perhaps one forms the Other’s projection across time.”9 Across time and space, the viewer occupies the space between.

     

    Clearly, in Hill’s art, what you see is not what you get; there is a space opened up for mediation and negotiation. That space is a space the subject/viewer enters. In the midst of these interventions the subject’s body takes on the place of mediation. In Lacanian terms, the body becomes the site of identity, the image and the screen, a site projected on to, and a site projecting itself. It is a space between text and image (between spoken words and projected images) and between the symbolic and the imaginary (between others in a room and one’s own bodily negotiation to remain out of the light).

     

    Notes

     

    1. Four Fundamental Concepts of Psychoanalysis, Trans. Alan Sheridan. (New York: Norton, 1978) 174.

     

    2. Four Fundamental Concepts 82. All further quotes given in text.

     

    3. “Standing Still on the Lip of Being: Gary Hill’s Learning Curve,” Gary Hill, Exhibition Catalog, Essays by Chris Bruce, et al. (Seattle: Henry Art Gallery/University of Washington, 1994) 92. < p> 4. “The see-saw of desire,” In The Seminar of Jacques Lacan; Book 1: Freud’s Papers on Technique, 1953-1954, trans. John Forrester (Cambridge: Cambridge UP, 1988) [Fr. 1975] 171.

     

    5. “Standing Still on the Lip of Being” 93.

     

    6. American Heritage Dictionary, 3rd ed, (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1992).

     

    7. “Beacon (Two Versions of the Imaginary),” Gary Hill 25.

     

    8. “Two Versions of the Imaginary,” The Gaze of Orpheus: and Other Literary Essays, trans. Lydia Davis, (Barrytown, NY: Station Hill Press, 1981) 79. Further quotes from this essay are given in text.

     

    9. “Beacon (Two Versions of the Imaginary)” 25.

     

     

  • Radio Lessons for the Internet

    Martin Spinelli

    Department of English
    State University of New York at Buffalo
    martins@acsu.buffalo.edu

     

    For the first time in history, the media are making possible mass participation in a social and socialized productive process, the practical means of which are in the hands of the masses themselves. Such a use of them would bring the communications media, which up to now have not deserved the name, into their own. In its present form, equipment like television or film does not serve communication but prevents it. It allows no reciprocal action between transmitter and receiver; technically speaking it reduces feedback to the lowest point compatible with the system.1

     

    These words were not written in celebration of the Internet, as one might expect, but were were written about radio decades ago by German broadcaster and poet, Hans Magnus Enzensberger.2 Enzensberger critiques mono-directional media and argues for a democratizing and empowering media rife with promise for the masses in a language that has recently found new currency with the net’s rise in popularity.

     

    The ease with which Enzensberger’s radio essay could be mistaken for a contemporary tract about the Internet attests to the similarities between the utopian rhetoric once used to promote radio and the rhetoric now being used to promote the Internet. This essay is a study of the promises made for two emergent media: radio and the Internet. Three common aspects arise in a close examination of the independent popularization of radio and the Internet: (1) the emergent medium is instilled with hopes of initiating utopian democracy, providing for universal and equal education, and bringing a sense of belonging to a community; (2) cultural investment in these hopes is encouraged by people in power and exploited for commercial gain; and (3) the rhetoric of these promises obfuscates any real understanding of the material place of the emergent medium in society (such as who has knowledge of its use, how is it used, how is it produced, how is it consumed, how it addresses both basic and inessential needs) and ultimately defuses any potential for social change the emergent medium might have had. After an analysis of the emergent media of radio and the Internet, and their utopian rhetoric, I want to suggest a less naive, more responsible rendition of the net and a way of describing the net that conceives of citizens as genuine producers, not consumers.

     

    That it operate in the “public interest, convenience or necessity” was the mandate handed down to radio in the Communications Act of 1934. But from its infancy as a laboratory experiment, through its advent on the market, radio was conceived by its creators not as a public service but as a consumer product. David Sarnoff, the future president of National Broadcasting Company, is often given credit for being the visionary employee of the Marconi Company who first imagined popular radio. In 1916, in a letter to the company’s general manager, he described the “Radio Music Box” which would “make radio a ‘household utility’ in the same sense as the piano or phonograph.”3 This letter, notably empty of ideas of public service, concludes with a generally overlooked table of projected radio sales which figures that $75 million can be made selling radio sets in the first three years they are put on the market.4 This document of the seminal moment in American radio shows only a profit motive driving the production of radio.

     

    Originally the companies that manufactured radio sets were the same companies that produced broadcast programs. As the federal government fumbled to insure standards and regulate the industry, programming was used to motivate people to consume radio sets.5 By the end of the 1920s, with network broadcasts beginning to cover the most populated areas of the U.S., radio began to enter the minds of social thinkers. Writers, politicians and educators began to characterize radio as the fertile ground where the seeds of a better life would take root and mature.

     

    “[A]nything man can imagine,”6 was how Martin Codel, a newspaper editor and later a radio theorist, described the promise of radio in 1930, nearly a decade after the first radio ad quoted Nathaniel Hawthorne to sell suburban homes to Manhattanites.7 Codel exemplifies the utopian strain in writing about radio, rhetoric that would be detached from any political agenda and unconscious of profit motive. Radio was nothing short of magical.

     

    [T]hat anything man can imagine he can do in the ethereal realm of radio will probably be an actual accomplishment some day. Perhaps radio, or something akin to radio, will one day give us mortals telepathic or occult senses!8

     

    Codel finds in the emergent medium a most interesting space: reality and fantastic projection overlap and become indistinguishable. This overlap, happening in the virtual space of radio, shifts the consideration of life possibilities from an everyday physical space to an ethereal, magical one. For Codel, before radio life possibilities were confined to what could be done in the material world; after radio there are no limits. The possibilities of the emergent radio are but virtual possibilities; they take place not in a material space, not in the space of a physical being in the physical world, but in the virtual and surrogate world provided by the emergent medium. Radio has created a new space that has not been fully understood. Its conditions and limits are as yet so vague that radio can give rise to any utopian plan or individual desire. The shift in focus onto the surrogate space of the emergent media, the place where real desires seem to find virtual or “occult” answers, will ultimately allow virtual or simulated equality to stand in for actual equality while the switch goes unnoticed.

     

    The feeling of fulfillment offered in the surrogate space of radio was a key element in the rhetoric of democracy and equality which evolved around the promotion of the emergent medium. The Codel-style euphoria that characterized earlier thinking on radio began to crystalize and soon led to the suggestion that buying a radio was like buying a seat in political chambers in that it promised a greater feeling of participation in a national democracy as well as a sense of access to that democracy not dependent on class status. Rudolf Arnheim, a German psychologist of media and communications effects, wrote in 1936 that the democratizing power of radio was so complete that it made class distinctions irrelevant, and the very concept of class an anachronism:

     

    Wireless eliminates not only the boundaries between countries but also between provinces and classes of society. It insists on the unity of national culture and makes for centralization, collectivism and standardization. Naturally its influence can only be extended to those who have a set, but from the very first there has nowhere been any attempt to reserve wireless reception as a privilege of certain classes, as it might have happened had the invention been at the disposal of feudal states.9

     

    While egalitarian and inclusive in proclamation, Arnheim’s conception of a public does not include all the people in a society. As Arnheim describes radio as a requirement for contemporary civilized life, membership in his public begins to be defined in terms of consumption:

     

    Rather it is the case that wireless, like every other necessity of life from butter to a car and a country house, is accessible to anyone who can pay for it, and since the price of a wireless set and a license can be kept low, wireless, like the newspaper and the film, has immediately become the possession of everyone.10

     

    The class limitations of his “everyone” are obvious; “everyone” means car owners and those that own a second (country) home, not urban laborers or people who walk or use public transportation. (But even if we accept Arnheim’s premise that everyone may claim a radio as a birthright, the previous element of his argument is similarly untenable: that equality of access to the emergent medium makes for social equality. In saying all people are now a priori equal by virtue of access, Arnheim renders inappropriate any attempt to describe the economic realities that separate different classes. Here the rhetoric of the emergent medium covers up class distinctions while not erasing them.) For Arnheim, the “universal commodity”11of radio confers citizenship; it is a “necessity” for citizens in a national culture. In order to be counted, one must tune in. This will soon evolve into: in order to participate in democracy, one must be a consumer.

     

    In returning to David Sarnoff we again find an elaboration of this ethic of consumption. In testimony before the Federal Communications Commission, Sarnoff describes consumption not only as a sign of membership in a national culture, but as a quasi-patriotic act that feeds other American (free market) ideals. Before the FCC, as president of the largest producer of receiving sets in the world (RCA),12 and chairman of the board for the first and largest radio network (NBC),13 Sarnoff skirts implications of monopoly while defending competition as an abstract principle.14 Sarnoff cloaked himself in the rhetoric of the social benefits of listenership in order to defend against federal anti-trust action. Because the emergent medium of radio could be conceived as a great leveler, it had a social value beyond price:

     

    [T]he importance of broadcasting cannot be measured in dollars and cents. It must be appraised by the effect it has upon the daily lives of the people of America — not only the masses who constitute a listening audience numbered in the tens of millions, but the sick, the isolated, and the under-privileged, to whom radio is a boon beyond price. The richest man cannot buy for himself what the poorest man gets free by radio.15

     

    The maintenance of the quality of radio as a social tool was more important than trust-busting. And because it is a tool that legitimates capitalist competition while feeding American myths of equality and equal opportunity in spite of class, Sarnoff could be given free reign to develop it in its current form. The emergent medium is described as existing beyond pecuniary value because it benefits all sectors of society; therefore it should transcend any critique of monopoly capitalism.

     

    What belies the true nature of this proclaimed public space is that its ownership and management were to remain decidedly in private hands. Apparently unaware of the implicit contradiction, a 1939 NBC informational pamphlet exclaims: “Fortunately for the United States, the democratic answer to the programming problem was found in private enterprise.”16 As is to be expected, neither Sarnoff nor NBC nor RCA articulates the limits of a democracy based on the idea of citizen-as-consumer fostered by private enterprise capitalism.17 How could they when their fortunes depend on nurturing a nation of consistent consumers?

     

    The rhetoric of radio’s power to democratize brought with it a renewed interest in the idea of community. Arnheim found in radio a sense of community defined in terms of use and interest, rather than proximity or economic relation. He explains how a national unity and identity are produced out of a collapse of geographic space:

     

    Wireless without prejudice serves everything that implies dissemination and community of feeling and works against separateness and isolation.18

     

    This replaces an old social order in which

     

    [t]he relation of man to man, of the individual to the community, of communities to one another was originally strictly determined by the diffusion of human beings on the surface of the earth. Spatial propinquity of people — so we used to think — makes for a close bond between them, facilitates common experience, exchange of thought and mutual help. Distance on the other hand makes for isolation and quiet, independence of thought and action . . . individuality and the possibility of sinking into one’s own ego. . . .19

     

    What would come about with the end of “distance” might today might be described as the totalitarian effects of a medium or its potential for control.20Radio can collapse a regional sensibility, displace independence and individuality, unify the national community, and make possible a general standardization. The emergent medium of radio, he says, both homogenizes and colonizes:

     

    Just as it incessantly hammers the sound of “educated speech” into the dialect-speaking mountain-dweller of its own land, it also carries language over the frontier.21

     

    Radio, for Arnheim at least, is a collector of individuals into some unified conception of a society, not a purveyor of choice.

     

    The utopian rhetoric of early radio often described this colonization as “education.” Collected in a celebratory volume on the first decade of radio published in 1930, Joy Elmer Morgan, then the editor of The Journal of the National Education Association, sees the emergent medium of radio as an educational tool ripe with potential. Earnestly, he declares radio a revolutionary tool on par with the invention of moveable type. As with moveable type, radio’s revolutionary nature lies in its ability to generate a unified cultural identity. For Morgan, education comes to mean a complete integration into this cultural identity:

     

    It will give to all that common background of information, ideals, and attitudes which binds us together into a vast community of thinking people. It is giving the school a new tool to use in its daily work. No one can estimate the stimulus which will come into unfolding life as radio brings it into instant contact with the great thoughts and deeds of our time.22

     

    Morgan also finds in radio a useful kind of isolation or bracketing off individual experience which insures a fidelity to the common cultural identity. In removing the unpredictable variable of interactivity found in the public school classroom, radio codifies experiences and allows for controlled learning in isolation. Radio makes possible distance-learning from home by turning the home into a sacrosanct schoolroom:

     

    [Radio] has helped to keep people in their homes and in that way to preserve the integrity of home life. No other agency can take the place of the home as a force for excellence and happiness. In it are the issues of life. In a very real sense it is the soil into which the roots of human life reach for spiritual nourishment and security. Whatever radio can do to strengthen the family circle is clear gain; whatever it can do through widespread instruction, looking toward better home practices in such matters as housing, nutrition, family finance, home relationships, home avocations, contributes to a better life.23

     

    Radio is the proposed antidote for the very social fragmentation it encourages. It is a provider of stability that works toward an America of happy homes while it limits broader human interaction. Socializing or organizing outside of the highly structured and morally regulated familial unit (communication that might lead to uncontrollable political union for example) is thus prevented. As Morgan continues, radio becomes more than just a force that keeps a family together. It provides a virtual example of an appropriate life: “Increasing numbers of people will catch a vision of what intelligent living really means.” The emergent medium civilizes and humanizes as it educates:

     

    Through experience, through study, through habits of industry and reflection, and through long years of right thinking and right doing, there comes into individual life a unity and a quiet sense of power and happiness which are the highest of human achievements. We believe radio has a contribution to make here both in the school and in the home. It widens the family circle and the school circle to include the ablest teachers, the most earnest preachers, and the noblest statesman.24

     

    Here consumption rhetorically becomes a productive act. Because it is tied to values of self-discipline and industry, radio has the power to turn buying and passive listening into things more than refining and educational. Consumption itself imparts “habits of industry” and provides a feeling of diligence.

     

    A survey of today’s radio landscape fails to reveal the flowering of what was then seen as nascent democracy, community, and educational potential. For a case study I look to Buffalo, New York, where (with the exception of three small independent holdouts) all commercial radio stations are now owned by four large media companies. The result is a dominance of talk radio and classic hits programming as these same companies fight over the same “average consumer.”25

     

    The recent decades of FCC deregulation allowed for format changes by freeing stations from having to employ news personnel and reducing or eliminating community service broadcasting requirements. But, because regulations preventing large-scale corporate ownership remained intact, the real homogenization of radio content did not occur until 1992 when FCC deregulation made it possible for a single company to own up to 49 percent of some radio markets.26 Consolidated ownership, when coupled with the programming deregulations of past years, has lead to a massive increase in the broadcast of canned programming (pre-recorded programs produced outside of the local region and distributed via satellite or postal carrier) in Buffalo.

     

    Hearing the listening choices diminish, and noticing in particular the lack of local bands now receiving air time, the Buffalo Common Council launched an investigation of local broadcasting in 1994. Their public study describes “a virtual blackout of local music”27: only one song in roughly 900 played on commercial radio came from a local band without a national record contract. The Council invited the management of local stations to a public forum to address concerns about the lack of local context and content in broadcasts and the reduced variety in program offerings. Instead of appearing at the forum, the management of WKSE-FM (consistently one of the top rated music stations in Buffalo) sent a letter to the Council stating that they had “no legal or moral obligation to play music by local musicians” and that there were no FCC guidelines indicating that they should even consider the issues raised by the Council:

     

    We retain the services of the country’s best broadcast consultants, research companies, and in-house employees to make decisions on our playlist. I can assure you that at no time has any data or direct input from our listeners ever given us reason to believe that a true demand exists for more music by local artists. It is our opinion that our ratings would be damaged and our profitability impaired if we were to increase our commitment to local musicians. . . . Meanwhile, we would encourage the local musicians coalition to strive to continually improve the quality of their work. Only then can they hope to gain a contract with a recording company who can promote them into a position to be played on our airwaves.28

     

    This letter emphasizes clearly and repeatedly that the profit motive exclusively, not any conception of community, is guiding the development of this radio station. The capitalism of deregulated commercial broadcasting does not even have room for the ideas “local” or “community.” In order for a band to be described as a local success it must have a national contract. Regional interest is simply not a category. It should further be noted that stations’ playlists do not even represent a kind of populist democracy in terms of most simple popular opinion determining what gets played. Marketing analysts are employed not to determine general popularity but only to define what is the most sellable or what will be the most appealing to an audience of consumers.29Here again membership in a public would be defined as an ability to purchase. The management of WKSE-FM has even failed to understand how, by only making available limited musical choices calculated to appeal to a targeted audience, they might help determine the musical taste and interest of local consumers. The station plays what is popular to increase listenership and advertizing revenue, but they have not recognized that what they play influences what gets bought and what is popular. Simply put: people will not buy music they have never heard before.

     

    Local music is not the only avenue presented for the expression of community. Talk radio has received much popular press for facilitating democracy. But this democracy is wholly inflected by a profit motive as well. Arbitron ratings for the Buffalo market (Autumn, 1995) show that a single and delineable demographic constitutes the audience for all the top talk shows. The fight to attract this demographic between every daytime talk show has eliminated content difference and reduced what might have been an exchange of ideas to a repetition of the single ideology of the target demographic. In Buffalo the hosts of all the daytime shows on all the top rated talk stations are exclusively right of center, libertarian, and populists (Rush Limbaugh, G. Gordon Liddy, or locally-based equivalents). For an active demonstration of the counter-democratic operation of these programs we need only examine the way the callers are handled: All calls are carefully screened to prevent airing anything that might shock listeners into turning off their radios. Guests and callers with views opposed to those of the host/audience are invited to speak only in so far as the host may confirm carefully predicted listener fears about an issue or to provide an opportunity for the host to engage in ad hominem or to assert his verbal prowess. Should a caller slip past the screener and seriously threaten the host/audience he or she is quickly and easily disconnected and the host is given ample time to recontextualize the caller in an unthreatening manner or to dismiss the caller as simply abhorrent. Talk radio “Democracy,” like “The Latest News,” or “The Greatest Hits of the ’70s,” is simply a programming format aimed at a specific demographic to insure faithful listening and (indirectly) steady consumption by the target audience. As with the radio of the 1930s, today’s talk radio offers only a promise of democracy.

     

    The utopian rhetoric that surrounded the emergent medium of radio functioned largely to obscure a profit motive; and, in a celebration of consumption-as-citizenship, the needs for real democracy, fulfilling community, and equality in education were not realized even in a virtual sense in the surrogate space of radio. The same hopes have become staples of Internet theory. As with radio, the utopian promotion of the net under the rubrics of democracy, community, and educational opportunity, will serve only to obscure economic and representational disparity and thwart any democratizing potential the net might have.

     

    In a recent Forbes magazine column, House Speaker of the 104th Congress, Newt Gingrich, gushes with praise for the democratizing, liberating potential he sees in the Internet:

     

    The information age means . . . more market orientation, more freedom for individuals, more opportunity for choice. Government must deal with it.30

     

    He seeks both to highlight the virtual potential of the information age, and to characterize government in its familiar role as antagonistic regulator of liberating emergent media.

     

    As it is typically characterized by Internet promoters, access to the net is another great social leveler which does away with government and gives equal weight to everyone’s voice. When Gingrich asserts, “Everybody’s an insider as long as you’re willing to access [the information on the net],”31 “access” becomes not simply a supplement to democracy, but the only way democracy can now work. In strikingly similar terms to the discussion of early radio, the emergent medium of the Internet can end the oligarchy and provide us with genuine democracy. For Gingrich, the Internet is not just a corrective to democracy, it is democracy.

     

    In January 1995, Gingrich testified in front of the House Ways and Means Committee about the democratic imperative of access to information through the Internet. He said:

     

    If we’re moving into the information age, don’t we have to figure out how to carry the poor with us? Don’t they have every right to have as much access as anybody else? . . . [M]aybe we need a tax credit for the poorest Americans to buy a laptop.32

     

    Gingrich neglects to acknowledge a basic economic reality in his assertion that a tax-credit-for-access would equal opportunity: He does not mention or is not aware that the vast majority of poor people would not save enough through an annual tax credit to buy even the most basic software package.

     

    The scope of net promotion is not confined to guaranteeing democracy. An evangelical zeal has evolved within Internet rhetoric. Being online offers a kind of salvation which must be heralded to everyone. In this way Gingrich’s Internet functions as Morgan’s radio did:

     

    Maybe private companies ought to do it. But somehow there has to be a missionary spirit in America that says to the poorest child in America, “Internet’s for you. The information age is for you.” There’s an alternative to prostitution, drug abuse and death, and we are committed to reaching every child in this country. And not in two generations or three generations; we’re committed this year, we’re committed now.33

     

    The recourse again to private ownership/management is more than a rehash of the now standard “smaller government” rhetoric. Its implications are capitalist colonization and perpetuation of a market. If private companies supply people with simply another way to consume wrapped in the promise of equal opportunity, money would soon find its way back to those owners in the form of training classes, always “affordable” user fees, and the sale of ancillary computer products and services each with additional attendant promises. Money that could be returned or given to the disenfranchised to improve their real lives (to buy clothes or food, to build new schools, or to rent busses to transport angry voters to Washington to lobby Congress or protest) is channeled back into the accounts of private companies. The virtual possibilities of “anything man can imagine” cover up real, material disparities with the promise of the benefits of access.

     

    The official vision for the Internet from the White House, The National Information Infrastructure: Agenda For Action, is also utopian. On the first page we encounter language that could have been lifted directly from Morgan’s tract on radio and education: “The best schools, teachers and courses would be available to all students, without regard to geography, distance, resources, or disability. . . .”34 This education is still based in some school somewhere, and maintains the rather traditional concept of education with students, teachers, and courses. Described in this way its disruptive force is not revealed. What this description lacks however is an acknowledgement of the real economic and political problems that can come with this idea of collapsed geography and local context. Carried to fruition, a centralized model of distance learning would electronically shift larger and larger blocks of the student population to what are currently considered the “best” schools. Increasing virtual enrollment at these (almost exclusively suburban) schools would cause a shift in public educational dollars from poorer schools less prepared to deal with the “information age” to schools already in possession of liberal technology budgets. Even better programs would then be created at the these large affluent schools. As poorer urban schools have funding decreased and are forced to close due to declining enrollment, poorer students who are currently excluded from the information age by the economic realities of their own lives and educational facilities would then be even further removed from the physical sites of education and would ultimately have less access to educational materials. These students will be left behind in the race to virtualize education.

     

    The Agenda continues, “vast resources of art, literature, and science are now available everywhere.”35 Beyond the overstatement (fewer than four hundred books are currently available online for the cost of access alone), this assertion reveals the Agenda‘s monolithic spirit. What the Agenda does not observe is that a fixation on a global community of art and literature will cause the destitution of locally relevant art and literature in the same manner that radio has meant the destitution of local music in our Buffalo example. While it is true that the net could be used as an archival site for regionally specific culture, this seems outside its purview. Couched in the Agenda‘s language of “best” and “greatest” is the belief that “art” means images from the Louvre, not ballads from Appalachia. In addition to the problems of what is and will be available in the globalized community of the Agenda, there is the more interesting notion of what the Agenda calls “universal access.” Following a vow to promote private-sector ownership of the net, the Agenda articulates its second objective which reads:

     

    Extend the ‘universal service’ concept to ensure that information resources are available to all at affordable prices. Because information means empowerment — and employment — the government has a duty to ensure that all Americans have access to the resources and job creation potential of the Information Age.36

     

    It continues:

     

    As a matter of fundamental fairness, this nation cannot accept a division of our people among telecommunications or information “haves” and “have-nots.” The Administration is committed to developing a broad, modern concept of Universal Service — one that would emphasize giving all Americans who desire it, easy, affordable access to advanced communications and information services, regardless of income, disability, or location.37

     

    As with Gingrich, “affordable access” to the emergent medium is made available to all. But what these official promoters have failed to recognize is that access by itself is meaningless and unimportant.

     

    There are, however, political gains of all sorts in the promotion of access to information as a social curative. Political thinking about the net is most often condensable to this: “If we give welfare mothers laptops they can get their benefits and do their shopping online and we can end the wasteful bureaucracies of Food Stamps and WIC; after access they shouldn’t be found asking for better schools because the best courses and teachers are already online; and they won’t need better ways of holding their elected officials accountable — protests and boycotts now being irrelevant — because dissent can now be sent neatly to Congress electronically.” In this system a mere feeling of representation in a community must replace actual representation.

     

    As with radio’s early promoters, the Agenda promises classlessness in an information age: “It can ameliorate the constraints of geography and economic status, and give all Americans a fair opportunity to go as far as their talents and ambitions will take them.”38 “Ameliorating constraints” is code for effacing real class difference.

     

    “Democracy” in the Agenda, as in Arnheim’s radio, means the act of consuming. Vice President Al Gore, in his contribution to the Agenda, goes so far as to say, “We can design a customer-driven electronic government.”39 Those without the technology, or without the opportunity to learn how to use this very class-bound technology, are left without representation in his electronic government. This conflation of the consumer with the voter can do nothing to realize any genuine democratic potential of the net. Again, the implication is that one must be buying the emergent medium to have representation.

     

    A similar kind of virtual/consumptive inclusion is evident in the assertion of community on the net. Howard Rheingold’s The Virtual Community (1994) offers an excellent reference for this new community spirit as embodied in the WELL of San Francisco (a typical fee-based computer network). The need for a fulfilling sense of community was so strong among the WELL’s creators that its 1985 design goals included the credo: “[The WELL] would be a community.”40 The conception of the electronic space as community existed before the space did. Even the name “WELL,” is a forced acronym designed to evoke an image of a traditional village resource. It stands for “Whole Earth ‘Lectronic Link.”

     

    Included in those goals was the belief that the WELL should be profit making. In trying to realize this goal the virtual value of electronic community becomes apparent; in telling the history of the WELL Rheingold invokes one of the WELL’s architects, Matthew McClure, whose vision was to “facilitate communications among interesting people” at “a revolutionary low price”:

     

    To reach a critical mass, [the architects] knew they would need to start with interesting people having conversations at a somewhat more elevated level than the usual BBS stuff. In Matthew’s words, “We needed a collection of shills who could draw the suckers into the tents.” So we invited a lot of interesting people, gave them free accounts, called them “hosts,” and encouraged them to re-create the atmosphere of a Paris salon — a bunch of salons.41

     

    The virtual community of the net is artificial even on its own terms: the communal feeling did not grow out of shared interests, but was formed by bribes, discount prices, and contrived social interaction. Its “community” was a commodity the WELL’s creators could then market like any other.

     

    But in spite of the celebration of the WELL as the new informal meeting place, a space that has replaced the pub, the cafe, and the park, Rheingold somehow manages to claim that the highest achievement for his electronic community is its ability to transport the user to yet another community. He describes the WELL as “a small town” with “a doorway that opens onto the blooming, buzzing confusion of the Net.”42 Movement, not destination is the real goal. This reveals that the net has clearly not replaced the corner coffee shop in that its greatest achievement is always transporting the user out of a community, leaving whenever a community promises to become recognizable or delineable. No real community, in the sense of actual interaction or exchange of something (ideas, goods, etc.) is ever sufficient. Clearly the promise of connection is more important than what is being connected to, this is the impulse that led to the virtualization of the idea of community in the first place. The eagerness to abandon and move on, rather than to work in and develop a community, mirrors the promise of that first radio ad: the better world is always just through the next gateway, ready-made and without those noisy neighbors. It also reveals that a buffet of choices is more important than developing the potential of the options or spaces already available. This is the same thinking that promises 500-channel television.43

     

    Despite utopian rhetoric’s complicity with monopoly capitalism and its actual denial of real democracy, community, and educational opportunity in promising their virtual equivalents, there may yet be value in the utopian expression of the emergent media. The value certainly does not exist in the “electronic commons” promised by the Agenda,44 any more than it existed in the almost identical “America’s Town Meeting of the Air” of the RCA of the 1930’s.45 In light of past failures, I would like to argue for a smarter, more aware, set of ideas to guide our thinking, a set of ideas conscious of the material realities of the “information age” and the Internet that does not pretend “affordable access” is social penicillin.

     

    To do this I would like to return to Enzensberger whose theory of the media may yet unlock any real potential for social change that might exist in the net. Enzensberger would not have us see in emergent media a panacea or a pacifier for the disenfranchised, but the power to “mobilize.” This mobilization is not the virtual movement of telnetting from San Francisco to Milan, nor is it access to the Library of Congress at affordable prices. It is the mobilization of production — that is, a public identified as producers, not consumers. Any democratic potential in an emergent medium must lie in its ability to facilitate the organization of non-virtual politics, not in vacuuming political action into itself.

     

    On only a few occasions have I experienced a glimmer of this kind of mobilization: the February 1995 “Freely Espousing” multi-city demonstration against cuts to the National Endowment for the Arts, the National Endowment for the Humanities, and the Corporation for Public Broadcasting. Protests and marches were planned and the net was used to help organize them and arrange their simultaneous occurrence. Distribution lists such as POETICS were used to provide information used for speeches and posters, and texts of angry letters were posted to be downloaded and mailed to politicians. It must be emphasized however that this example does not address “access” as an issue of class and shows the net being used for mobilization by people on the cultural margins but not the economically disenfranchised.

     

    Other, primarily aesthetic, versions of this mobilization exist within the net. Mobilization on the net happens around textual poaching,46 the reinflection of texts already generated by the medium in order to elaborate new meanings or uses to discrete users. The Anti-hegemony Project47 poached texts and formats from news oriented usergroups to illustrate the vacuity of traditional news coverage and to poke fun at the group of writers spontaneously involved in producing the Project. Also, the currently difficult to regulate transfers of information (if not ownership and access) of the net facilitate valuable copyright violations which occasionally make available everything from philosophical texts to pornography otherwise locked up by publishing company capitalism and intellectual property law. But as the technology of information control and intellectual property law evolve to service the needs of private enterprise these useful moments will doubtlessly become more scarce.

     

    But in spite of these moments of genuine productive potential and sparks of mobilization, the current system of ownership and management of access generally renders the productive activity on the net framed by consumption on all sides. In order to produce anything, whether news story or parody, we must not only buy a modem but access time for every minute of our productive activity. The argument can be made that there are costs of consumption involved in every productive activity. But the one-time purchase of a computer or typewriter, and the continuous cost of paper to print on, are minimal (and get less and less significant over time) when compared to the 3 dollar an hour (plus extras) charge of most access providers. And interestingly, the vast majority of information produced on the net (the writing of user groups and chat rooms) already seems to revolve almost exclusively around other consumptive activities: the consumption of goods or of other media products. And further, it must be restated that the cultural community or democracy of the net, in so far as it consists of a collection of producing subjects, is still extremely class bound. Observing that a kind of creative enfranchisement exists for those with the money and the education to use the net does not minimize the efficacy of our critique of the Gingrichian classless democracy proclaimed by Internet promoters.

     

    Corporate ownership of the media, says Enzensberger, is simply antithetical to a conception of citizen-as-producer and only affords the most co-opted and simulated form of production:

     

    To this end, the men who own the media have developed special programmes which are usually called “Democratic Forum” or something of the kind. There, tucked away in the corner, the reader(listener/viewer) has his say, which can naturally be cut short at any time. As is the case of public opinion polling, he is only asked questions so that he may have a chance to confirm his own dependence. It is a control circuit where what is fed in has already made complete allowance for the feedback.48

     

    The responsible role then for those in possession of the technology of use is to insure not a universal access to what has already been produced, but to insure a universal knowledge of media production which grows out of, and contributes to, an understanding of material social relations. This means more than simply making the economic and class realities of human relations more central to the subjects of the media; it means actually using the media to enact a change in material circumstances. Revolutionaries of all stripes learned this decades ago, hence broadcasting centers are always the first things seized in a political overthrow.

     

    Neither the Internet, nor radio, is some kind of deus ex machina of democracy, community, or education. The net is only an emergent medium, existing in a specific context with a real set of material confines, and possibly with a real potential. But it is a potential that will remain unrealized if we allow the drive to virtualize to obscure its material base and the economic realities of our culture.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Hans Magnus Enzensberger, “Constituents of a Theory of the Media,” New Left Review 64 (1970) 15.

     

    2. Enzensberger’s career as a writer, broadcaster and critic spans various genres and addresses various audiences. After having attended several German Universities as well as the Sorbonne, Enzensberger could have easily entered academe, but he chose initially to engage with the world on a more populist level. He joined Radio Stuttgart and began producing radio essays. During years of radio work, journalism, writing poetry and criticism, and guest lecturing in the 1950’s and 1960’s, Enzensberger evolved as a protegee of the Frankfurt School. In 1964, on the event of his first public address as the poet-in-residence at Frankfurt University, he was introduced by Theodor Adorno. His works of criticism, poetry, novels and plays interrogate a broad range of topics (Spanish anarchism, cultural progress and barbarism, documentary fieldwork, communication technology, etc.) and have always been informed by political analysis. In 1968 he gave up a fellowship at Wesleyan University and left the United States in protest of the Vietnam War. Hans Magnus Enzensberger, Critical Essays, ed. R. Grimm and B. Armstrong with a forward by J. Simmon (New York: Continuum, 1982) xi-xv. “Constituents of a Theory of the Media” serves as both a series of observations about the genuine potential of emergent media and as a site of utopian hyperbole about emergent media, it therefore makes an excellent point of departure for our discussion.

     

    3. Radio Corporation of America, Principles and Practices of Network Radio Broadcasting — Testimony of David Sarnoff Before the Federal Communications Commission November 14, 1938 and May 17, 1939 (New York: RCA Institute Technical Press, 1939) 102.

     

    4. RCA 104.

     

    5. Robert Hilliard and Michael Keith, The Broadcasting Century (Boston: Focal Press, 1992) 28-29.

     

    6. Martin Codel, “Introduction,” Radio and Its Future, ed. Martin Codel (New York: Harper & Brothers Publishers, 1930. New York: Arno Press and the New York Times, 1972) xi.

     

    7. Hilliard 30.

     

    8. Codel xi.

     

    9. Rudolf Arnheim, Radio, trans. Margaret Ludwig and Herbert Read (London: Faber & Faber, 1936; New York: Arno Press and The New York Times, 1971) 238-39.

     

    10. Arnheim 239.

     

    11. Arnheim 239.

     

    12. RCA 10.

     

    13. Hilliard 48.

     

    14. Sarnoff says, “Our policies are based on the belief that the public interest . . . will best be served by a strong, prosperous, and growing radio industry, and by vigorous competition which results in better service to the public and greater stimulus to the industry.” (RCA 7)

     

    15. RCA 12.

     

    16. National Broadcasting Company, Inc., Broadcasting in the Public Interest ([New York]: National Broadcasting Company, 1939) 10.

     

    17. The emphasis on “private enterprise” in the American discourse of radio owes much to the extensive use of radio by fascist European governments at this time. It only took a few casual references to Nazi Germany to create a popular fear of the idea public ownership (government management) of radio in America. This fear of fascism was used by Sarnoff and others to stall the regulatory efforts of the FCC. For an example of this fear of government managed media see Thomas Grandin’s The Political Use of the Radio (Geneva: Geneva Research Institute, 1939).

     

    18. Arnheim 232-233.

     

    19. Arnheim 227.

     

    20. These totalitarian aspects, viewed as favorable by Arnheim in the emergent medium of radio, are almost always absent from discussions of the emergent medium of the Internet. But if this totalitarian potential is found to be essential in one emergent medium it probably also exists in another. Obviously today an Internet promoter would not laud this potential but conceal it.

     

    21. Arnheim 223.

     

    22. Morgan 68.

     

    23. Morgan 71.

     

    24. Morgan 74.

     

    25. Anthony Violanti, “Uneasy Listening,” The Buffalo News 22 April 1994, “Gusto” section: 20. One local politician describes the state of the city’s radio as “below banality.” See also Violanti’s “Morning Madness,” The Buffalo News 10 March 1995, “Gusto” section: 18.

     

    26. David Franczyk, The State of Buffalo Radio (Buffalo: The Buffalo Common Council, 1994) Appendix E.

     

    27. Franczyk 11.

     

    28. Franczyk, Appendix D.

     

    29. “The myth is, of course, that the American public gets the programming it wants (and can thus blame no one but itself for the banality of mass culture); the reality is that the American public gets programming calculated to attract the “commodity audience” with limited concern for what most [people] actually desire.” (Henry Jenkins, Textual Poachers [New York: Routledge, 1992] 30)

     

    30. Newt Gingrich, “Newt’s Brave New World,” Forbes 27 February 1995, “ASAP” section: 93.

     

    31. Gingrich 93.

     

    32. “Gingrich Pushes Computers for Poor,” The Los Angeles Times 6 January 1995: A18.

     

    33. Gingrich 93.

     

    34. The White House, The National Information Infrastructure: Agenda for Action (Washington, D.C.: The White House, 1993) 3.

     

    35. The White House 5.

     

    36. The White House 5.

     

    37. The White House 8.

     

    38. The White House 12.

     

    39. The White House 17.

     

    40. Howard Rheingold, The Virtual Community (New York: HarperPerennial, 1994) 43.

     

    41. Rheingold 42.

     

    42. Rheingold 10.

     

    43. For a discussion of the social ramifications of this virtual movement, and an understanding of the virtual ideology that it facilitates, see Arthur Kroker and Michael A. Weinstein, Data Trash: the Theory of the Virtual Class (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1994).

     

    44. The White House 15.

     

    45. RCA 12.

     

    46. Henry Jenkins, in his Textual Poachers, provides a useful model and vocabulary in his discussion of TV series fans as producers of a kind of cultural community. Fans of Star Trek pirate stories and characters from the series to produce new stories in fanzines, songs and videos. Armed with copyright attorneys the owners of the series object to this appropriation. Fanzines draw attacks from Hollywood because they short-circuit the desired distribution and consumption of a product: new products with roots in an old series are distributed without any involvement of, or profit to, network TV or Hollywood. But because the commodity of the net is different from that of Hollywood or network TV — it is access or means of consumption/distribution not an image or story — the poaching metaphor must be deployed differently to describe would-be alternative culture on the net. Since the “text” in the case of the net is access, “poaching” would resemble something like stealing blocks of AOL time for non-profit or anarchist purposes.

     

    47. Archived at the Electronic Poetry Center. http://wings.buffalo.edu/epc/

     

    48. Enzensberger 22.

     

  • “Early Spring” and “Equinox”

    Cory Brown

    Ithaca College
    cbrown@ithaca.edu

     

    Early Spring

     

    It is early evening of a spring late,
    very late in coming–so late, in mid-April
    the deep crescents and parabolas of snow
    in the yard, resisting even an imperceptible
    slide down the subtle slopes on a chilly
    gray evening, seem something new grass
    may simply latch onto to grow on
    and carpet right over. And the child’s
    swing in the yard, and the clothesline too,
    are moving back and forth in a way which,
    to me, represents a motion seemingly knowing.
    Like someone slowly rocking–toes, heels,
    toes, heels–someone who’s been standing
    a long while, say, in a cold snow waiting
    for a bus, foothills of the Ozarks or Rockies
    in the distance, implacable and unforgiving
    as they block the early evening sun–
    and the grayness begins to bear down
    as she ponders the disease which has taken
    a mind she thought was well secured
    and robbed it of its house, its room of memory,
    his own street’s name, his spouse’s name–
    her name!–their children’s faces,
    indiscriminately the minutest details
    that surfaced their lives then slowly sank
    to what she thought was an inviolable core.

     

    Equinox

     

    It is dark outside, sixteenth of April
    and the stars are turning and turning,
    but the equinox is weeks to come it seems.
    Dolls around the house, mice and bears,
    a cow and little doll boys and girls,
    are seemingly mesmerized by the sound
    the dryer makes late at night,
    when animation’s at a standstill and cars
    and trucks on the nearby highway are hushed.
    Hush my sweets, your bangs are growing
    sweetly into your eyes, but we will
    trim them back. And your ankles
    sometimes ache in your growing pains,
    like my knees do when the world
    suggests that you will suffer one day
    before you die. And the word “die”
    sends the ache up my thighs and into
    my chest. There are small baskets
    of varying sizes around the house;
    one from Easter a few days ago casts
    its handle’s arched shadow onto the yellow
    wall. And the globe atop another table
    goes untouched, Australia catching day
    after day of sunshine and dust. It is
    too much, at times, to synthesize
    the desires, to subliminate the question,
    to wonder how long the child’s marble
    will remain misplaced beneath the wicker
    chair before a chance encounter
    brings to light its green translucence.

     

  • Hyper in 20th Century Culture: The Dialectics of Transition From Modernism to Postmodernism*

    Michael Epstein

    January 1994, Atlanta
    Emory University
    russmne@emoryu1.cc.emory.edu

     

    1. The Modernist Premises of Postmodernism

     

    The first half of the 20th century evolved under the banner of numerous revolutions, such as the “social,” “cultural” and “sexual,” and revolutionary changes in physics, psychology, biology, philosophy, literature and the arts. In Russia, momentous changes took place in spheres which were not the same as those in the West. But both worlds were united through a common revolutionary model. This fact explains the typological similarities, which have emerged in the second half of the 20th century, between Western postmodernism and contemporary Russian culture, which is evolving, like its Western counterpart, under the sign of “post”: as post-communist or post-utopian culture.

     

    Our analysis will deal with the laws of cultural development of the 20th century which are shared by the Western world and Russian society, nothwithstanding the fact that this was Russia’s epoch of tragic isolation from and aggressive opposition to the West. It was Russia’s revolutionary project which distinguished her from the West, but it was precisely through this “revolutionariness” that Russia inscribed herself into the cultural paradigm of the 20th century.

     

    Revolutions are certainly a part of the Modernist project. In the widest meaning of the term “modern,” this project is a quest for and reconstruction of an authentic, higher, essential reality, to be found beyond the conventional, arbitrary sign systems of culture. The founding father of Modernism was in this respect Jean-Jacques Rousseau, with his critique of contemporary civilization and discovery of a primal, “unspoilt” existence of man in nature. The thought of Marx, Nietzsche and Freud, which exposed the illusion of an ideological self-consciousness, discovered an “essential” reality in the self-propagation of matter and material production, in the life instinct, in the will to power, in the sexual drive and in the power of the unconscious. These discoveries were all creations of Modernism.

     

    In this same sense, James Joyce, with his discovery of the “stream of consciousness” and the “mythological prototypes” underlying the conventional forms of the “contemporary individual,” was a Modernist. The same can be said of Kazimir Malevich, who erased the multiplicity of colors of the visible world in order to uncover its geometric foundation, the “black square.” Velimir Khlebnikov, who insisted on the essential reality of the “self-valuable,” “trans-sense” word, affirmed the shamanistic incantation of the type “bobeobi peli guby” in place of the conventional language of symbols. Although antagonistic to artistic Modernism, the communist revolution was a manifestation of political Modernism. It strove to bring to power the “true creators of reality,” who “generated material well-being” — namely the working masses. These masses would bring down the “parasitic” classes, who distort and alienate reality, appropriating for themselves the fruits of the labour of others by means of all manner of ideological illusions and the bureaucratic apparatus.

     

    On the whole, Modernism can be defined as a revolution which strove to abolish the arbitrary character of culture and the relativity of signs in order to affirm the hidden absoluteness of being, regardless of how one defined this essential, authentic being: whether as “matter” and “economics” in Marxism, “life” in Nietzsche, “libido” and “the unconscious” in Freud, “creative elan” in Bergson, “stream of consciousness” in William James and James Joyce, “being” in Heidegger, the “self-valuable word” in Futurism or “the power of workers and peasants” in Bolshevism. The list could go on.

     

    Postmodernism, as is known, directs its sharpest criticism at Modernism for the latter’s adherence to the illusion of an “ultimate truth,” an “absolute language,” a “new style,” all of which were supposed to lead to the “essential reality.” The name itself points to the fact that Postmodernism constituted itself as a new cultural paradigm in the very process of differentiating itself from Modernism, as an experiment in the self-enclosure of sign systems, of language folding in upon itself. The very notion of a reality beyond that of signs is criticised by Postmodernism as the “last” in a series of illusions, as a survival of the old “metaphysics of presence.” The world of secondariness, that is, of conventional and contingent presentations, proves to be more authentic and primary than the so-called “true reality,” in fact, “transcendental” world. This critique of “realistic fallacy” nurtures diverse postmodern movements. One of these, Russian Conceptualism, for instance, exposes the nature of Soviet reality as an ideological mirage and as a system of “supersignificant” signs projected by the ruling mind onto the empty place of the imaginary “signified.”

     

    Our task is to explore the intricate relationship of Modernism and Postmodernism as the two complementary aspects of one cultural paradigm which can be designated by the notion “hyper” and which in the subsequent analysis will fall into the two connected categories, those of “super” and “pseudo.” If Russian and Western Postmodernism have their common roots in their respective Modernist past and the revolutionary obsession with the “super,” so also the current parallels between Western Postmodernism and its Russian counterpart, their common engagement with the “pseudo,” allow us to glimpse the phenomenon of Postmodernism in general in a new dimension. This new depth, which it acquires through the comparison, is projected as the path leading out of a common revolutionary past, whose heritage both postmodern paradigms — the Russian and the Western one — are striving to overcome.

     

    Paradoxically, it was the revolution as a quest and an affirmation of a “supersignified,” a “pure” or “essential” reality, which has led to the formation of the pseudo-realities, constituted by hollow, non-referential signs of reality, with which postmodern culture plays in both Russia and the West.

     

    What follows is an attempt to analyze “the modernist premises of postmodernism in the light of postmodern perspectives of modernism,” or, simply speaking, the interdependence of the two historical phenomena. My argument will focus on the variety of modernist approaches, in physics (quantum mechanics), in literary theory (new criticism), in philosophy (existentialism), in psychoanalytic theories and practices (sexual revolution), in Soviet social and intellectual trends, such as “collectivism” and “materialism” — which expose the phenomenon of “hyper” in its first stage, as a revolutionary overturn of the “classic” paradigm and an assertion of a “true, essential reality,” or “super-reality.” In the second stage, the same phenomena are realized and exposed as “pseudo-realities,” thus marking the transformation of “hyper” itself, its inevitable transition from modernist to postmodernist stage, from “super” to “pseudo.” What I want to argue is the necessary connection between these two stages, “super” and “pseudo,” in the development of 20th century cultural paradigm. The concept of “hyper” highlights not only the lines of continuity between modernism and postmodernism, but also the parallel developments in Russian and Western postmodernisms as reactions to and revisions of common “revolutionary” legacy.

     

    2. “Hyper” in Science and Culture

     

    A series of diverse manifestations in the arts, sciences, philosophy and politics of the 20th century can be united under the category “hyper.” This prefix literally means “heightened” or “excessive”; its popularity in contemporary cultural theory reflects the fact that many tendencies of 20th century life have been brought to a limit of development, so that they have come to reveal their own antitheses.

     

    The concept of “hyperreality” in the above sense of the prefix “hyper” has been advanced by the Italian cultural semiotician Umberto Eco and the French sociologist and philosopher Jean Baudrillard, both of whom relate it to the disappearance of reality in the face of the dominance of the mass media. On the face of it, mass communication technology appears to capture reality in all its minutest details. But on that advanced level of penetration into the facts, the technical and visual means themselves construct a reality of another order, which has been called “hyperreality.” This “hyperreality” is a phantasmic creation of the means of mass communication, but as such it emerges as a more authentic, exact, “real” reality than the one we perceive in the life around us.

     

    An illustrative example is the influential movement in the art of the 1970’s and early 1980’s, called Hyper-Realism. Works produced by this movement included giant color photographs, framed and functioning as pictures. Details, such as the skin on a man’s face, appeared in such blow-ups that it was possible to see every pore, every roughness of surface, and every protuberance not normally visible with the naked eye. This is the “hyper”-effect, which allows reality to acquire an “excessively real” dimension due entirely to the means of its technical reproduction.

     

    According to Baudrillard, reality which is firmly entwined in a net of mass communication has disappeared completely from the contemporary Western world, ceding its place to hyperreality which is produced by artificial means:

     

    Reality itself founders in hyperrealism, the meticulous reduplication of the real, preferrably through another, reproductive medium, such as photography. From medium to medium, the real is volatilized, becoming an allegory of death. But it is also, in a sense, reinforced through its own destruction. It becomes reality for its own sake, the fetishism of the lost object . . . the hyperreal.1

     

    This paradox was discovered by quantum physics long before the advent of the theoreticians of postmodernism. It was the scientists who first discovered that the elementary particles, that is, the objects of observation, were largely determined by the measuring instruments. The reality which was revealed to the physicists from the late 1920’s onwards came to be increasingly recognised as a “hyperreality,” since it was constituted by the parameters of the measuring equipment and the mathematical calculations. In the words of the American physicists Heinz Pagels, “it is meaningless to talk about the physical properties of quantum objects without precisely specifying the experimental arrangement by which you intend to measure them. Quantum reality is in part an observer-created reality. . . . [W]ith the quantum theory, human intention influences the structure of the physical world.”2

     

    The most challenging methodological question in present-day physics, engaged in the modelling of such speculative entities as “quarks” and “strings,” is the question of what is in fact being investigated? What is the status of the so-called physical objects and in what sense can they be called “physical” and “objects,” if they are called into existence by a series of mathematical operations?”

     

    Quantum mechanics became the first discipline to admit to its hyper-scientific character or, more precisely, the hyper-physical nature of its objects. In getting ever closer to the elementary foundations of matter, science is discovering the imaginary and purely rational character of that physical reality, which it allegedly describes but which in fact it invents. In the past, discoveries and inventions could be clearly distinguished: the former revealed something that really existed in nature, the latter created something that was possible and useful in technology. In the present, there are no such strictly delimited categories of discoveries and inventions, since all discoveries tend to become inventions. The difference between discovery and invention has become blurred, at least as far as the deepest, originary layers of reality are concerned. The more one penetrates into these layers, the more one finds oneself in the depths of one’s own consciousness.

     

    In the same way, the more perfect instruments for the observation of physical reality are used, the less can it be detected as reality in a proper sense, as something different from the very conditions of its observation. This is precisely the creation of “an observer-created reality” which makes the case for Baudrillard’s concept of hyperreality. The notion of “hyperreality,” in relation to cultural objects, was introduced by Baudrillard in his book Symbolic Exchange and Death (1976), half a century later than Niels Bohr laid foundation for the new understanding of physical objects as “influenced” by human intention (1927). It is the improvement of instruments for the observation and reproduction of physical and cultural reality that dimmed out reality as such and made it interchangeable with its own representations. In his statement “From medium to medium, the real is volatilized . . .” Baudrillard refers to the most authentic and sensitive means for the reproduction of reality, such as photography, cinema, and television. Paradoxically, the more truthful are the methods of representation, the more dubious the category of truth becomes. An object presented with the maximum authenticity does not differ any more from its own copy. Hyperreality supplants reality as truthfulness makes truth unattainable.

     

    Alongside the hyperphysical objects, there are several other parallel processes generating the “hyper,” emerging particularly in the timespan of 1920’s to the 1930’s. These spheres of “hyperization” are so diverse and at such distance from one another that it is impossible to speak about a direct influence between these processes. Rather, they describe a new limit of being and perception, at which Russia and the West had simultaneously arrived.

     

    3. Hyper-Textuality3

     

    In the human sciences the same thing takes place as in the natural sciences. Along with hyperphysical objects emerges what could be called hypertextuality. The relationship between criticism and literature undergoes a change. The Modernist criticism of the 1920’s and 1930’s, as represented by the most influential schools, such as Russian Formalism and Anglo-American New Criticism, and later Structuralism, attempts to free itself from all historical, social, biographical and psychological moments, integrated into literature, in order to separate the phenomenon of pure literariness. This literariness of literature is analogous to the “elementary particles” of the texture of literature, its ultimate and irreducible essence.

     

    Criticism is engaged in purifying the stuff of literature by separating from it all those additional layers, with which it was encumbered by schools of criticism of earlier times: the Enlightenment, Romanticism, Realism, the biographical, psychological and historical criticism, the criticism of Naturalism and Symbolism, and all other critical fashions of the 19th and early 20th century. That is, criticism now wanted to free literature from an imposed content in order to turn literature into pure form, to reduce it to the “device as such,” to the text in itself. Everything which was valued in literature — the reflection of historical reality, the author’s world view, the influence of the intellectual trends of the times, the inferred higher reality of symbolic meanings — all of this now seemed naive and old-fashioned and extraneous to literature.

     

    But as the process of purification of literature from all non-literary elements continued to reduce literature to the text itself, so the process of appropriation of that text by criticism developed alongside it, until the text was transformed into a thing wholly dependent on and even engendered by criticism. The literary work thus becomes a textual product, created in the modernist critical laboratory by means of the splitting of literatures into “particles” or structural elements and by virtue of the separation of literature from the admixtures of “historicity,” “biographicality,” “culturalness,” “emotionalism,” “philosophicalness,” considered alien and detrimental to the text.

     

    In the same manner as textual criticism, quantum mechanics splits the physical object — the atom — into so many minimal component parts whose objective existence fades into ideal projections of the methods of observation and the properties of the physical measuring appartus. Pure textual signs, excised from literature in the manner of the smallest irreducible particles or quants, are equivalent to ideal projections of the critical methodology. Since these signs are purified of all meanings, supposedly imposed by the author’s subjectivity and extraneous historical circumstances, the critic is the only one empowered to read them as signs carrying meanings or signs with potential meanings. It is the critic who determines the meanings of those signs, intially purified of all meanings.

     

    The paradoxical result of such a purification of literature has been its increasing reliance on criticism and on the method of interpretation. Both Formalism and Anglo-American ‘new criticism’ make literature accessible to the reader through the intermediary action of criticism itself. Literature thus becomes a system of pure devices or signs, filled with meanings by a criticism according to one or another method of interpretation. In other words, criticism bans literature from its own territory and substitutes the power which the writer used to exercise over the mind of the reader by the power of the critic.

     

    In the mid-60’s, the result of this modernist overturn was reflected in the words of the English critic George Steiner who complains about this new status of a critic as the Master of a hyper-textuality: “The true critic is servant to the poet; today he is acting as master, or being taken as such.”4 Similarly, Umberto Eco remarks that “at present, poetics are coming more and more to get the upper hand of the work of art. . . .”5 And according to the writer Saul Bellow, “criticism tries to control the approaches to literature. It confronts the reader with its barriers of interpretation. A docile public consents to this monopoly of the specialists — those ‘without whom literature cannot be understood.’ Critics, speaking for writers, succeeded eventually in replacing them.”6

     

    Certainly, all these negative responses to the modernist revolution in criticism belong themselves to anti-, rather than postmodernist consciousness; more precisely, they designate the very limits of modernism. Postmodernism emerged no sooner than the reality of text itself was understood as an illusionary projection of a critic’s semiotic power or, more pluralistically, any reader’s interpretative power (“dissemination of meanings”). The critical revolution which began with Russian formalism in the 1920’s and continued with structuralism in the 1950’s-1960’s ended with a brief reaction in the 1960’s when lamentations about “the critical situation” and the domination of critic over creator became popular. With the advent of postmodernism, both modernist enthusiasm for the “pure” reality of text and antimodernist nostalgia for the “lost” reality of literature became things of the past.

     

    4. Hyper-Existentiality

     

    Hypertextuality as a phenomenon of literary criticism parallels the phenomenon of the hyper-object created by physical science. Another form of “hyper” can be found in one of the leading Western philosophical trends between the 1920’s to the 1950’s. European Existentialism turned to the authentic reality of individual existence, to “being as such,” which precedes any categorization, every rational generalization. With this, Existentialism seemed to subject the “abstract,” “rationalistic” consciousness of idealistic systems from Plato to Descartes and Hegel to crushing criticism.

     

    Yet it is the case that as early as Dostoevsky’s Notes from Underground, Russian literature pointed to the process of the production of being or of “pure existence” from a[n] [abstract] consciousness which dissolved all concreteness and formalness of being. This “pure being” was constituted by the temporal duration of a permanence. Existence thus became a pure abstraction of being, produced by consciousness and deprived of all characteristics which might impart concreteness to it. In his concreteness, a man is either one or another entity, he is either lazy or diligent, a clerk or a peasant and so on. Dostoevsky’s underground man, one of the first Existentialist (anti)heroes in world literature, is not even capable of rising to the definition of a good-for-nothing, or an insect. His consciousness is infinite and even “sick” in its “excessiveness”; it destroys the definitiveness which enslaves the “dull,” “limited” people of action, pushing towards that ultimate limit of existence at which a human being is nothing concrete but only is, simply exists.

     

    Not only couldn’t I make myself malevolent, I couldn’t make myself anything: neither good nor bad, neither a scoundrel nor an honest man, neither a hero nor an insect. . . . [A] wise man can’t seriously make himself anything. . . . After all, the direct, immediate, legitimate fruit of heightened consciousness is inertia. . . . I practise thinking, and consequently each of my primary causes pulls along another, even more primary, in its wake, and so on ad infinitum. That is really the essence of all thinking and self-awareness. . . . And finally, “Soon we shall invent a method of being born from an idea.7

     

    Thus existentialist critique of routine forms of existence (“neither a hero nor an insect”), paradoxically, brings forth even more abstract kind of existence, “a method of being born from an idea.” The quest for such absolute being, which precedes all rational definitions and general classifications — such as psychological traits or the attributes of belonging to a profession — is not less abstract and rational than such classifications. It is even more abstract. It is the limit of the abstraction of being, which is also an abstraction of singularity, resulting in a kind of “hypersingularity,” which is only itself and which is alien to all forms of typicality. Such is the result of the existential quest. This “hypersingularity,” based on the “in-and-for-itself” (to borrow a Hegelian term), is the highest possible abstraction, which clings to the “tip” of the self-conscious consciousness, dissolving all qualitative determinateness. This it does in the same way as quantum physics dissolves the determinateness of matter to obtain elementary particles as projections of mathematical description. Precisely because of its “elementariness,” existence thus becomes the metaphysical “quant,” the ultimate, indivisible particle of “matter” or existence-as-such — a derivation of the most speculative type of consciousness, which objectifies itself in the form of “being as such.” The existentialist self-definition “I am” is much more abstract than “essentialist” definitions like “I am a reasonable being” or “I am a lazy man.”

     

    In Hegel, the Absolute Idea develops through its embodiment in increasingly concrete forms of being, according to the principle formulated as “the progression from the abstract to the concrete.” Starting with Kierkegaard, being itself becomes a form of abstraction. This is the abstraction of “the particular,” the unique “this one here,” which applies equally to any concrete form of existence, from insects to human beings, from the peasant to the artist, who are completely dissociated from any typical features of the genus, which Hegel still endows with the concreteness of the manifest idea. Contrary to a conventional opinion, Kierkegaard is a much more abstract thinker than Hegel. Hegel’s thought proceeds from the abstract idea to its specific manifestations, whereas Kierkegaard’s thought proceeds from concrete idea to abstract singularity. Hegel’s Idea goes through the process of concretization through being; the Existentialists’ being itself goes through a process of abstraction through the ultimate generalization of the idea of “being.” Thus being becomes “pure being” or an almost empty abstraction, a “hyperbeing,” the form of Heidegger’s and Sartre’s “nothing.”

     

    Sartre’s La Nausee demonstrates how the “unhappy” consciousness of Roquentin, not bound by anything and raised to the highest degree of abstractness, suddenly encounters — but in reality engenders — the abstract texture of being, of the roots and of the earth, stubborn in its absurdity and inducing nausea. This absurdity, which the Existentialist consciousness discovers everywhere as the revelation of a “true” reality, which has not been distorted or generalised, and which is given anterior to any act of rationalization, is in fact “hyperreality.” It is the product of a rational generalisation, which singles out in the world such an all-embracing trait as the “irrational.”

     

    Existentialism is not a negation of rationalism but rather its ultimate expansion, a method of rationalistic construction of the universal principle of irrationality, designated as “will” by Schopenhauer, as “life” by Nietzsche, as “existence” and “the individual” by Kierkegaard. This irrationality is much more cerebral and abstract than all the forms of rationality which divide being into concrete types, into essences, into laws and into concepts. Rationality always contains at least a certain dose of concreteness because it is always in a determinate relation with “some thing,” it is “the sense of a concrete thing,” the rationality of something which needs to be defined or specified from a rational point of view. “Irrationality” does not demand such concretisation, it is “irrationality as such,” “the absurdity of everything,” it represents “an all-embracing absurdity.” It betrays its ultimate generality precisely through its totally and nausiatingly indiscriminate relationship to the concrete things. The irrational world, which ostensibly eschews rational definition, is a product of the most schematizing rationality, which negates all concrete definitions of things and which finds its ultimate expression in abstractions such as “existence as such,” “the particular as such.”

     

    At this ultimate level of abstraction, being is only the opposite of non-being. As Sartre asserts in Being and Nothingness, consciousness, or being-for-itself, in its freedom from all ontological determinations, is pure nothingness emerging from itself and nullifying, or, to use a Sartrean term, “nihilating” the substantial definitions of the exterior world.

     

    The type of existence of the For-itself is a pure internal negation. . . . Thus determination is a nothing which does not belong as an internal structure either to the thing or to consciousness, but its being is to-be-summoned by the For-itself across a system of internal negations in which the in-itself [the world of objects] is revealed in its indifference to all that is not itself.8

     

    As Hazel E. Barnes comments, in Sartre “consciousness exists as consciousness by making a nothingness arise between it and the object of which it is consciousness. Thus nihilation is that by which consciousness exists.”9Therefore, the phenomenon of existence is determined by the series of “internal negations,” proceeding from the consciousness as pure nothingness. In this case, the absurdity of being, as it appears to the nullifying consciousness, can be understood as the derivative of this nothingness, of this abstraction that strips concrete things of their meaning. One would imagine that there is nothing more abstract than “nothing,” since it is draws itself away from all peculiarities and specificities of being; but being, as it is posited in Existential philosophy, is even more abstract than non-being, since it emerges as the second order projection of this nothingness. This is no longer that nothingness which has a reality in-and-for-itself, like the self-effacing nothingness of self-consciousness. This is a nothingness which has lost that intimate relationship to its for-itself and which is turned towards the absurd Being which surrounds it, which is pure abstraction, deprived of even the concreteness of self-consciousness and of self-negation. This Being is simple nonentity — a being-for-no-one.

     

    Behind the apparently authentic and self-evident “existence as such” postulated by Existentialism, one can detect the hyper-reality of a reason abstracted from itself in the emptied form of ultimate irrationality. It is a conceptual abstraction to such a degree that it abstracts itself from its own rational foundation in order to affirm itself as its own opposite — as Being as such, ungraspable by reason, unconcretizable and untypifiable. There are two degrees of abstraction: a moderate abstraction, which is confined to the sphere of reason, and an extreme abstraction, which goes beyond the limits of reason. When rational abstraction goes as far as to abstract from rationality itself, it converts into the concept of universal irrationality. This form of abstracting reason from reason is the one which gives rise to the notion of the non-sense of pure Being.

     

    5. Hyper-Sexuality

     

    In the 20th century, the “hyper” phenomenon is also in evidence in the sphere of intimate personal relationships, in which experimentations with sex come to the fore. War is declared on the Puritanism of the 19th century and the entire Christian ethics of “asceticism.” The sexual instinct is set up as the primordial reality, underlying thought and culture. The Nietzschean celebration of the life of the body prepared European society, which had experienced the trauma of the First World War and the explosion of aggressive emotions, for the acceptance of psychoanalysis, which becomes the dominant intellectual trend of the 1920’s. The scientific work of Sigmund Freud and Wilhelm Reich and their pupils, the artistic discoveries of surrealists, Joyce, Thomas Mann, D.H. Lawrence, Henry Miller and others, the new freedom of sexual mores characteristic of the culture of jazz and cabaret — all of these things placed the 1920’s under the banner of the so-called “sexual revolution.” The “basic instinct” is sought in theory and art, and extracted in pure form as the “libido.”

     

    But, as already noted by many critics, in this pure form, the “basic instinct,” abstracted from all other human capabilities and driving forces, is nothing but an abstract scheme, the fruit of the analytic activity of reason. In the words of the English novelist and religious writer, C.S. Lewis, “Lust is more abstract than logic; it seeks (hope triumphing over experience) for some purely sexual, hence purely imaginary conjunction of an impossible maleness with an impossible femaleness.”10 Moreover, the notion of an “abstract lust” emanates from a bookish, post-logical conception of desire, generated by the theorizing of the sexual revolution. The passionate dionysiac ecstasy of the “flesh as such” thus becomes like the burning fantasy of the onanist, who through pure mental effort separates this flesh from the great diversity of the individual spiritual and physical qualities of the desired “object.” On an individual level, such exaggerated fantasies may lead to the exhaustion of physiological potency. On the scale of Western civilization, it was a construction of still another level of hyper-reality: the artificial reproduction of bodily images, more bright, tangible, concentrated, hypnotically effective than the physical reality of the body, and therefore evoking mental ecstacy while eroding the properly physical component of attraction. Thomas Eliot noticed about Lawrence’s novels: “His struggle against over-intellectualized life is the history of his own over-intellectualized nature.”11 As is the case with existentialism, the struggle against rationalism is an expression of over-rational approach, an abstraction of “existence of such” or “flesh as such.”

     

    Critics often point to this internal contradiction of Lawrence’s creativity: “[H]is world of love [is] more strangely and purely abstract than that of any other great author. The more intense and urgent it is the more it is a world inside the head. . . . [T]he ‘phallic consciousness’ seems a hyper-intellectual, hyper-aesthetic affair, making Lady Chatterly one of the most inflexibly highbrow novels ever written.”12 It is interesting that Bayley still uses the prefix “hyper” to characterize the intellectual component of Lawrence’s erotic images, while today we would rather identify them as “hypersexual.” In the first case, hyper means “super,” while in the second case “pseudo” or “quasi”: the critic’s implication is that Lawrence’s images are super-intellectual, but pseudo-sexual. This evolution of hyper‘s predominant meaning from super to pseudo constitutes the very core of hyper‘s dialectics, as will be discussed in the last section of this chapter.

     

    Hypersexuality, as one might call this “rationally” abstracted and hyperbolised sexuality, emerges in the theories of Freud and in the novels of D.H. Lawrence, as well as, on a more basic level, in the upsurge in the circulation of pornographic writing. Pornography is the very bastion of hypersexuality which presents the condensed simulacra of sexuality: glossy photographs and screen images of unthinkable sex, of unimaginably large breasts, powerful thighs and violent orgasms.

     

    Even the theory of psychoanalysis, for all its scientific caution and sophistication, reveals this hyper-sexual, and more broadly hyper-real, tendency. The world of the unconscious, proclaimed by Freud to be the primal human reality, was discovered or invented by consciousness, as its internal, in-depth “self-projection.” This invention assumed the proportions of another reality, preceding and exceeding the reality of consciousness itself. True to its ultimate destiny in the 20th century, consciousness thus creates something other than itself out of itself in order to surrender to this other as something primal and incontestably powerful. A more likely explanation of this phenomenon is that it is not at all a primary or “pre-existing” reality, opposed to consciousness from within, but that the unconscious is constructed by consciousness itself as a form of self-alienation of consciousness, which then sets itself up as a “super-real” entity dominating the latter. Hyperreality is a mode of self-alienation of consciousness. The Freudian unconscious thus becomes one of the most pronounced and hypnotically convincing projections of consciousness “outside itself.” As Derrida remarked, “the ‘unconscious’ is no more a ‘thing’ than it is a virtual or masked consciousness,” the continuously delayed consciousness which can never come to terms with itself.13

     

    Even Freud admitted that the discovery of the unconscious as a force dominating consciousness must serve the overall increase in the power of consciousness itself. Psychoanalysis is a process of decoding and illuminating the unconscious, which would allow consciousness to regain control over this “boiling cauldron of desires.” In other words, consciousness discovers the unconscious in its ‘underground’ in order to resume dominance over it. Thus psychoanalysis is the method of penetrating into those spheres of consciousness which consciousness itself had declared to be beyond its penetration; through the symbols of the unconscious, consciouness plays hide-and-seek with itself.

     

    As distinct from quantum mechanics, which recognizes its physical object to be prestructured by consciousness a priori, psychoanalysis sets up the conscious structuring of its psychical object as its final goal. But in both cases the physical and psychic realities prove to be at least partially projections or functions of the intellect, which observes and analyzes them. Perhaps psychoanalysis would benefit methodologically if it followed the example of quantum mechanics and recognized that the observed attributes of the unconscious were primarily determined by or even derived from the very conditions of its observation and description.

     

    The significance of the sexual revolution, theoretically dominated by psychoanalysis, did not consist of the fact that organic life and instinctual life changed the modes of their existence from one being dominated by consciousness to one of dominance. That was only the ideological intention, the “wishful thinking” of the revolution. Where instinct dominated — in the intimate sphere, in real-life sexual relations — there it had always been dominant. The sexual revolution was in fact a revolution of consciousness, which had learned to produce life-like simulations of a “pure” sexuality, which were all the more “ecstatic” the more abstract and rational they became. The result of the sexual revolution was not so much a triumph of “natural” sex as a triumph of the mental over the sexual. Sex thus became a spectacle, a psychological commodity, reproduced in infinite phantasies of seduction, of hypersexual power, of a hyper-masculinity and a hyper-femininity. This “hyper,” which renders sexual images into mass products of popular culture, is a quality missing from nature. It is a quality introduced by a consciousness with infinite powers for abstraction and generalization.14

     

    6. Hyper-Sociality

     

    The four processes indicated so far, which led to the creation of hyperobjects — namely: the hyperparticles of quantum mechanics, the hypersigns of literary criticism, the hyperbeing of Existentialism and the hyperinstincts of psychoanalysis and the sexual revolution — were processes taking place in the advanced Western societies of the 20th century. Within the communist world, however, similar processes of “hyperization” were taking place at the same time, during the 1920’s and 1930’s, and these extended over the whole social sphere. Even communism itself, its theory and practice, could be viewed as the typically Eastern counterpart of the “hyper”-phenomenon.

     

    Soviet society was obsessed with the idea of communality, of the communalization of life. Individualism was castigated as the gravest sin and a “cursed remnant of the bourgeois past.” Collectivism was proclaimed the highest moral principle. The economy was built on the communalization of private property, which came under the jurisdiction of the entire people. The communal was placed infinitely higher than the individual. Communal existence was considered to be prior and determinative in relation to individual consciousness, in full accordance with Karl Marx’s formula: “It is not the consciousness of men that determines their existence, but their social existence that determines their consciousness.”15 In factories, in kolkhozes, in party meetings, in penal colonies, and in urban communal apartments, a new man “of communist future” was produced — a conscientious and effective cog in the gigantic wheel of the collectivist machine.

     

    But this new type of sociality, infinitely tighter and denser in its imperatives compared to the earlier (pre-revolutionary) one, was nothing but another instance of hypersociality and a simulacrum of communality. In fact, the social bonds which unite people were rapidly being destroyed. Towards the middle of the 1930’s, even people in familial relationships, like husbands and wives, parents and children, could no longer trust one another in all respects; their Party loyalty and social obligations forced them to denounce and betray even their closest friends. The civil war and the process of collectivization destroyed the natural ties among members of the same nationalities and professional communities. “The most tightly-knit society in the world” (a cliché of Soviet propaganda) was an aggregate of frightened, alienated individuals and tiny, weak social units of families and friends, each of which was trying on his or her own to survive and to withstand state pressure.

     

    Even the base of the entire state pyramid rested on the will of a single individual, who regulated according to his own needs or judgement the work of the whole gigantic social mechanism. And it is curious that it is precisely communism, with its will to communality, which always and everywhere gave rise to the personality cult: in Russia, in China, in North Korea, Roumania, Albania and Cuba. This is not accidental but is the expression of the hypersocial nature of the new society. Communism is not a natural, primary sociality, arising on the basis of biological and economic connections and needs, which unite people. It is a sociality constructed consciously, according to a plan, emanating from the individual mind of the “founder,” and enacted by the individual will of “the leader.”

     

    The “pure” sociality of the communist type is similar to all those modernist models of “hypers” described above: the “pure” sexuality of psychoanalysis, the textuality of new criticism, and the elementariness of quantum mechanics. Communism thus represents some sort of hypnotic quintessence of the social body, which excludes and destroys everything individual and concrete by virtue of its exclusive abstractness — and for this very reason reveals, in the final analysis, its purely individualistic and speculative origin. If we conventionally qualify the pre-modernist state of civilization as “traditional,” then traditional sociality made provisions for the whole gammut of individual diversity and for private forms of property, just as traditional sexuality included the physical, emotional, social, and spiritual intimacy of two people, and just as the traditional work of art gave expression to the views of the author and the spirit of the age. But the “hyper,” by virtue of its artifically constructed character, is the “extract,” the “quintessence” as it were, of one particular property or sign to the exclusion of all others. Hypertextuality excludes all illusions of a separable, distinct content (opposed to form), hypersexuality excludes the notion of a “spiritual intimacy,” or “sexual relation.”16 In similar fashion, hypersociality excludes the “illusion of independence and personal freedom.” “Hyperization,” the process enacted by modernism and realized by postmodernism, achieves this exclusion precisely because it represents the hypertrophy of an abstract property, its heightening to an absolute, “super” degree.

     

    7. Hyper-Materiality

     

    The same applies to the basis of the basis of the Soviet Weltanschauung — “scientific materialism.” From its point of view, physical matter comes first, is primary while consciousness and spirit are secondary. Reality is through and through material and even thought represents only one form of the “movement of matter,” along with physical, chemical, and biological forms of the same movement. Such is the postulate of this philosophy, aspiring towards a completely sober, scientific approach to reality, verified by experience. “The world is moving matter, and nothing exists which would not be a specific form of matter, its property or a form of its movement. This principle took shape on the basis of the achievements of scientific cognition and Man’s practical mastery of Nature.”17

     

    But as is well-known, in practice Soviet materialism never tried to conform to the laws of material reality but strove instead to refashion this reality. The material of nature was subjected to merciless exploitation, pollution and destruction, the material life of the people was brought into decline, the economy was subordinated not to the material laws of production but to entirely idealistic five-year plans and ideological edicts of the successive party congresses. As Andrei Bely remarked at the beginning of the 1930’s, the dominance of materialism in the USSR brought about the voiding of matter itself. Materialism was, in essence, a purely ideological construct, which raised the primacy of material into a theoretical absolute. In practice, materialism annihilated the material. “Matter,” which is thus aggrandized and separated from the principles of spirituality, consciousness and aim-orientedness, becomes a simulacrum of matter, destructive of matter as such. Just as hypersociality served the cult of the singular personality, so hypermateriality became a means of legitimating abstract ideas in their scholastically enclosed finality. The materiality of this materialism was thus the same “hyper” phenomenen as “collectivism,” “the libido,” “the elementary particle” and “the pure text.”

     

    It is significant that out of the six spheres of “hyperization,” three are traditionally subsumed under the term “revolution”: the social, sexual and scientific. But three other “hypers” — hyperexistentialism, hypermaterialism and hypertextuality — can equally well be qualified by the term “revolution,” since they, too, developed in a movement of complete reevaluation of values: from essentialism to existentialism (the revolution in Western philosophy); from idealism to materialism (the revolution in Soviet philosophy); from “idea” and “content” to form and device and text (the revolution in criticism). To this we can add the revolution in the means of communication — the mass media revolution — which led to the birth of TV, video and computer technologies, producing a reality on the screen, perceived as more real than the world beyond the screen.

     

    8. From Super to Pseudo

     

    The very nature of the revolution appears in a new light — as the means or force productive of hyperphenomena. In its straightforward aims, the revolution is a coup — it sets up one antithesis in the place of another: matter in the place of thought, the collective in the place of the individual, the text in place of its content, the instinct in the place of the intellect. . . . But paradoxically it is revolution itself which demonstrates the impossibilty of reversal and expands, rather than eliminates, the power of the “suppressed.” That which is victorious in a revolution, gradually turns out to subordinate itself more and more to the very thing which it was supposed to have vanquished. Materialism has thus turned out to be much more detrimental to the notion of matter and much more scholastic and abstract than any idealistic philosophy anterior to it. Communism has turned out to be more favorable for the abolute affirmation of a singular, almighty individuality than any kind of individualism which preceded it. Literature reduced to a text and to a system of pure signs turns out to be much more dependent on the will of the critic than “traditional” literature, filled with historical, biographical and ideological contents. Matter, reduced to elementary particles, turns out to be a much more ideal entity, mathematically construed, than matter in the traditional sense of the term, having a certain inertia mass. Sexuality reduced to pure drive turns out to be much more cerebral and phantasmagorical than the ordinary sexual urge, which results in a total state of enamouredness in the physical, emotional and spiritual sense. It is the “purity,” the “quintessentiality” as the goal of all the above-named revolutions — pure sociality, pure materiality, pure sexuality and so on — which transforms them into pure antithesis and negations of themselves. That is why pure reality is ultimately a simulation — a simulacrum — of the property of “being real.”

     

    Let us return to the initial meaning of the prefix “hyper.” Unlike the prefixes “over-” and “su[pe]r-,” it designates not simply a heightened degree of the property it qualifies, but a superlative degree which exceeds a certain limit. (The same meaning is found in words like “hypertonia,” “hypertrophy,” “hyperinflation,” “hyperbole” . . .) This excess is such an abundant surplus of the quality in question that in crossing the limit it turns into its own antithesis reveals its own illusionary nature. The meaning of “hyper,” therefore, is a combination of two meanings: “super” and “pseudo.” “Hyper” is such a “super” that through excess and transgression undermines its own reality and reveals itself as “pseudo.” By negation of a thesis, the revolutionary antithesis grows into “super” but finally exposes its own derivative and simulative character.

     

    Certainly, it is neither the classic Hegelian dialectics of thesis and antithesis with subsequent reconciliation in synthesis, nor the modernist model of negative dialectics elaborated in the Frankfurt school (Theodor Adorno and Herbert Marcuse), with an irreducible opposition of a revolutionary antithesis to a conservative thesis. Postmodernist dialectics (if it is still possible to combine such heterogeneous terms) implies neither reconciliation nor revolution but the internal tension of irony. Antithesis, pushed to an extreme, finds thesis inside itself, moreover, exposes itself as an extension and intensification of this very thesis. Revolutionary negation proves to be an aggrandizement, a hyperbole of what is negated. Antithesis circles back on thesis, as its disguised and exaggeratated projection.

     

    In this way, materialism proves to be not a negation of idealism, but its most radical and militant form, ruthlessly destructive in regard to materiality. Communism proves to be not a negation of individualism, but its most voluntarist form ruthlessly destructive in regard to communality. The “hyper” is the “other” of the initial quality (“thesis”), its “second order” reality, its virtual intensity. The excess of quality turns into the illusion of this quality whereas its opposite which was intently negated actually becomes heightened.

     

    Thus hypersociality heightens the power of an individual over society. It is a sociality raised to a political and moral imperative, to an absolute degree of “oughtness” or “duty,” which is no longer connected to any particular being, like mother, father, child, one’s neighbour and so on, but which, instead, destroys all such particulars in order to absolutize an ultimate individuality or particularity in the “personality cult.” The meaning of “hyper” in this instance subdivides further into the following: “super” and “pseudo.” Hypersociality is thus simultaneously a supersociality and a pseudosociality. That is, the social factor is subject to such a degree of intensification that it exceeds and negates all the particularities which initially made up the social. Thus the social becomes the virtual “other” of the social, which through its phantasmic growth fills a space which does not belong to it — the space of the particulars and, therefore, of the social itself, which it stifles.

     

    Historically, intensity and illusion, “super” and the “pseudo” evolve in the development of “hyper” only gradually, as two successive stages. Its first “revolutionary” phase is represented by the “super.” This is the phase of the enthusiastic discovery or construction of new realities: of the socialist “supersociety,” of the emancipated “supersexuality,” of the elementary “superparticle,” of the self-referential “supertext,” of the self-propelled “supermatter.” The first half of the 20th century was mainly preoccupied with the revolutionary advancement of all these “super” phenomena. They germinated in the 1900’s to 1910’s in the theoretical soil of Marxism, Freudianism and Nietzscheanism; in the 1920’s and 1930’s, these “super” theories take on practical form — as the social, sexual, scientific, philosophical and critical revolutions.

     

    This is followed in the second half of the 20th century by a gradual realization of the virtuality of all these ubiquitous superlatives. “Hyper” flips to its other side and second stage — “pseudo.” The transition from the “super” to the “pseudo,” from the ecstatic illusions of pure reality to the ironic realization of this reality as a pure illusion, accounts for the historical transformation of European and Russian culture in the 20th century which can also be described as the movement from modernism to postmodernism.

     

    From this standpoint, Gorbachev’s perestroika (meaning literally, “reconstruction”) and Derrida’s deconstruction can be seen as isomorphic stages in the development of Soviet hyper-sociality and Western hyper-textuality.18 Both exemplify a transition from the “super” stage, manifested in the rise of communism and formalism (“new criticism”) in 1920’s-30’s, to the “pseudo” stage of 1970’s-1980’s. Both demonstrate that “structuredness” (in the form of ideally structured society or structuralist conception of textuality), which was the goal proclaimed by communist and formalist-structuralist movements, manifests only the illusion of social integrity or logical coherence. In the same way that Gorbachev revealed the illusory character of socialism, which proved to be a utopian communality of alienated individuals, Derrida exposed the illusory character of structuralism, of the very notion of “structure” which proved to be a utopian communality of actually decentered, dispersed, disseminated signs.

     

    The “pseudo” phase is the common denominator for all the crises taking place at the end of the 20th century in place of the constructs of the early 20th century: social, scientific, philosophical and other revolutions. Under the sign of the “pseudo,” all of the following phenomena undergo a crisis: the crisis of structuralism in the human sciences, the crisis of the concept of elementariness in physics, the crisis of Leftist projects and Freudian Marxism in political ideology, the crisis of materialism, existentialism and positivism in philosopy, the demise of Soviet ideocratic system and communist society — such are the consequences of world-wide metamorphosis of “hyper” from “super” to “pseudo.” It is a crisis of the utopian consciousness as such, followed by the construction of parodic “pseudo”-utopian discourses.

     

    In its historical evolution from the “super” to the “pseudo,” the “hyper” only now becomes revealed in its full significance, as the necessary connection and succession of its two phases, modernism and postmodernism. Modernism viewed its revolutionary accomplishments as a breakthrough into metaphysically “pure” reality of the super: supersexuality, supermateriality, supersociality — whereas postmodernism reveals the full range of the hyper’s dialectics, as an inevitable conversion of “super” to “pseudo.” From a postmodernist perspective, socialist revolution, sexual revolution, existentialism, materialism are far from being those liberational insights into the highest and “truest” reality they claimed to be. Rather they are intellectual machines designed for the production of pseudomateriality, pseudosexuality, pseudosociality, etc. Thus postmodernism finds in modernism not only the target of criticism, but also the ground for its own play with hyperphenomena. These hyperphenomena would be impossible if not for those revolutionary obsessions with the “super” that gave rise to the tangible “voids” and flamboyant simulacra of contemporary civilization, including non-sensical, empty forms of totalitarian ideologies which gave rise to Russian postmodernism.

     

    In the final analysis, every “super” phenomenon sooner or later reveals its own reverse side, its “pseudo.” Such is the peculiarly postmodernist dialectics of “hyper,” distinct from both Hegelian dialectics of comprehensive synthesis and Leftist dialectics of pure negation. It is the ironic dialectics of intensification-simulation, of “super” turned into “pseudo.”

     

    Every revolution of the first half of the 20th century is doubled and cancelled out with its own “post” of the century’s end. These “posts” are sprouting in all cultural spaces where the most radical changes and dramatic reversals occurred in the modernist era. Contemporary society is postmodern, postcommunist, post-utopian, post-industrial, post-materialist, post-existential, and post-sexual. At this point, the dialectics of “hyper,” which shaped the ironic wholeness of 20th century culture, comes to its complete self-realization.

    Notes

     

    *This essay is an excerpt from the forthcoming book, Russian Postmodernism: New Perspectives on Late Soviet and Post-Soviet Literature, written by Mikhail Epstein, Alexander Genis, and Slobodanka Vladiv-Glover, and published by Berghahn Books (Providence, Rhode Island and Oxford). Publication is scheduled for Spring, 1997. The ISBNs are as follows: 1-57181-028-5 (cloth) and 1-57181-098-6 (paper). Thanks to Dr. Vladiv-Glover, who translated and edited the original Russian language version of this essay. It was then revised and extended by the author.

     

    1. Jean Baudrillard, Selected Writings, ed. Mark Poster (Stanford: Stanford UP, 1988) 144-145.

     

    2. Heinz R. Pagels, “Uncertainty and Complementarity,” The World Treasury of Physics, Astronomy, and Mathematics, ed. Timothy Ferris (Boston: Little, Brown and Co., 1991) 106.

     

    3. As a reader will see, the concept of “hyper-textuality” in the context of this article has nothing to do with the “hyper-text” in commonly-understood, “electronic” sense of the word. “Hyper” is used here in the sense “super” and “pseudo” which relates it to the concepts of “hyper-sexuality,” “hyper-sociality,” etc.

     

    4. George Steiner, Human Literacy, in The Critical Moment. Essays on the Nature of Literature (London, 1964) 22.

     

    5. Umberto Eco, “The Analysis of Structure,” ibid. 138.

     

    6. Saul Bellow, “Scepticism and the Depth of Life,” The Arts and the Public, ed. James E. Miller Jr. and Paul D. Herring (Chicago-London: U of Chicago P, 1967) 23.

     

    7. Fyodor Dostoevsky, Notes From Underground/The Double, Trans. Jessie Coulson (London: Penguin Books, 1972) 16, 26, 27.

     

    8. Jean-Paul Sartre, Being and Nothingness, trans. Hazel E. Barnes (New York: Washington Square Books, 1966) 256, 257.

     

    9. Sartre 804.

     

    10. C.S. Lewis, The Allegory of Love (New York: Oxford UP, 1958) 196.

     

    11. Cited in D.H. Lawrence: A Critical Anthology, ed. H. Coombes (Harmondsworth: Penguin Education, 1973) 244.

     

    12. John Bayley, The Characters of Love (New York: Basic Books, 1960) 24, 25.

     

    13. Jacques Derrida, “Différance,” A Derrida Reader. Between the Blinds, (New York: Columbia UP, 1991) 73.

     

    14. In more detail the phenomena of hyper-textuality and hyper-sexuality, though in different terms, are considered in my articles “Kritika v konflikte s tvorchestvom” (“Criticism in Conflict with Creativity”), Voprosy literatury (Moscow, 1975) 2: 131-168; and “V poiskakh estestvennogo cheloveka” (“In Search of a Natural Human Being”), Voprosy literatury, (1976), 8: 111-145. Both articles are included in my book Paradoksy novizny. O literaturnom razvitii XIX-XX vekov (“The Paradoxes of Innovation. On the Development of Literature in the l9th and 20th Centuries”) (Moscow: Sovetskii Pisatel’, l988). The affinity between these two modes of hyper (hyper-textuality and hyper-sexuality) is formulated in the following way: “What is the general meaning of the paradoxes examined in the articles about ‘critical situation’ and ‘sexual revolution?’ In one case criticism attempts to extract from its object, literature, the most ‘literary’ essence and to isolate it from non-literature; as a result, it takes up the priority that was designed for the text purified from all ‘metaphysical’ contaminations. In another case, literature (and art in general) attempts to extract from its object, a human being, the most ‘natural’ essence, to purify it from all ‘intellectual’ contaminations; the result is the devastation of nature itself and the triumph of pure rationality” (Paradoksy novizny 249).

     

    15. K. Marx. “Marx, Engels, Lenin: On Dialectical Materialism,” Preface, A Contribution to the Critique of Political Economy (Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1977) 43.

     

    16. Compare Lacan’s “There is no sexual relation.” “A Love Letter (Une Lettre D’Amour),” Feminine Sexuality: Jacques Lacan and the école freudienne, ed J. Mitchell and J. Rose, trans. J. Rose (London: Macmillan, 1983) 149-161.

     

    17. A Dictionary for Believers and Nonbelievers, trans. Catherine Judelson (Moscow: Progress Publishers, 1989) 336. The same formulation can be found in all Soviet textbooks of dialectical materialism.

     

    18. Derrida’s own comments on the relationship between the concepts of “perestroika” and “deconstruction” can be found in his small book on his trip to Moscow in 1990. Zhak Derrida v Moskve: dekonstruktsiia puteshestviia (“Jacques Derrida in Moscow: a deconstruction of the journey”) (Moscow: RIK “Kul’tura,” 1993) 53.

     

  • Deleuze, Sense and the Event of AIDS

    C. Colwell

    Villanova University
    ccolwell@ucis.vill.edu

     

    . . . and the moral of that is — “Take care of the sense and the sounds will take care of themselves.”

     

    –the Duchess.1

     

    AIDS, like cancer, syphilis, cholera, leprosy and bubonic plague before it, has woven the threads of our biological, social and moral existence together into a complex disease entity that is much more than the physical interaction between its cause(s) and the human organism. It presents those already marginalized individuals and communities most affected by it (so far) with personal and political challenges that threaten their social and their physical existence. And it presents the scientific and medical community with a challenge and puzzle that equals, if not surpasses, those that have preceded it. But it is a mistake to separate these two arenas (social/political and scientific) as they inscribe on one another their codes of sense and meaning in a hyper-dialectic of transcription and reverse transcription. It is, as such, a mistake to take the biological objects offered to us by science (specifically the HIV virus) as referents free from infection by meanings ideally supposed to be excluded from its domain. What I will attempt in the following is to mobilize Gilles Deleuze’s notion of sense, as he presents it in The Logic of Sense,2 as a strategy for understanding the direction that the meaning of AIDS has taken and as a means of multiplying other directions that it might take.

     

    As a preliminary sketch of the strategy that I will draw out of Deleuze I want to distinguish between three levels, strata or series that his discussion of sense will deal with: thoughts, things, and sense/events. Thoughts, insofar as they have meaning (are meaningful, make sense), are a function of language, i.e., the form and matter of their expression is that of language. But meaning is about or of things.3 As Michel Foucault notes in The Birth of the Clinic, the problem lies in the relation between words and things.4The Logic of Sense is directed at that gap between words and things in an attempt to understand what it is that bridges the gap, what inhabits the interval. Briefly, Deleuze uses the term “states of affairs” to refer to things and begins his analysis of words with propositions. Between the two he locates a realm of “sense” and “event” (which he equates as two sides of a plane without thickness). It seems to me that it is to the sense/event that we must direct our attention if we are to address the multi-faceted (social, political, economic and scientific) phenomenon of AIDS.

     

    The first section of this essay is an explication of Deleuze’s notions of sense and event as a propadeutic to addressing the specific sense/event of AIDS. Deleuze’s approach is particularly useful here as it provides a conceptual strategy that accounts for the complex interactions between those arenas of meaning that are traditionally (and mistakenly) held separate while avoiding the mirror image errors of positivism and linguistic idealism to which much of post-Kantian philosophy of language is prone. In the second section I turn to the sense/event of AIDS, addressing in particular the social, political, economic and scientific dominance of the HIV model. I conclude by suggesting the ways in which this strategy allows us to pervert and transform the current hegemonic model of AIDS in all its facets. Let me stress at this point that I am using Deleuze’s work as a strategy here instead of as a conceptual model. As will become clear towards the end of this essay I am less concerned with developing a “better” conceptual model of AIDS than I am with perverting the dominant model(s).

     

    I. Sense/Event

     

    Although, as Jean-Jacques Lecercle notes,5 Deleuze largely bypasses those thinkers who have treated the question of sense in the last century, it is worth briefly addressing Gottlob Frege’s analysis of sense. In his seminal paper “On Sense and Reference (Meaning)”6 Frege distinguishes between the “mode of presentation” of a sign (sense) and that which the sign designates (reference). His purpose here is to give an adequate account of the functioning of propositions that contain signs that either have no referent (e.g., propositions in which “Odysseus” is the subject) or cases in which propositions containing different signs have the same referent (“morning star,” “evening star,” and Venus). While Frege rehearses a form of neo-positivism and privileges reference (due to its truth value function) to the detriment of sense there is one point worth noting here. Frege asserts that sense has a certain objectivity, that it is not subjective since it can be, and is, the property of more than one thinker. As such, Frege equates sense with thought (here thought is not the result of a thinker’s mental activity but that which a thinker “grasps”) and positions it between the subjective ideas of thinkers and the objects to which thought refers.

     

    The striking thing is that Frege moves the consideration of sense out of the realm of both subjects and objects. That is, a philosophy of sense is neither a philosophy of the subject (phenomenology/existentialism) nor a philosophy of the object (positivism), although in the end it is on the side of the object, the referent, that Frege positions himself.7 This notion of sense as residing in the “in-between” is one of the two notions I want to retain from Frege. As to the second, Deleuze plays on the multiple meanings of the French word sens, “meaning,” “direction” or sense as a faculty of perception. While I will mobilize all of these meanings I also want to retain Frege’s use of the term as a “mode of presentation.”

     

    Deleuze arrives at the realm of sense from two directions, one beginning with words or propositions, the other beginning with things or states of affairs. From the standpoint of words, he begins with three relations within the proposition: denotation, (which links the proposition to particular things); manifestation (which links the proposition to the beliefs, intentions, etc., of a speaker); and signification (which links the proposition to general or universal concepts) (LS 12-14).8 The problem arises when we seek to understand which of these relations is the primary one, i.e., which functions as the ground of the other two. Depending on one’s standpoint, each of the three relations offers itself as primary. In speech (parole), manifestation is primary since it is the “I” which begins (to speak). This is, of course, Descartes’ position in which the cogito functions as the ground of all propositions; it is the I which, e.g., denotes this piece of wax (LS 14). In language (langue) however, it is signification which is primary. In language, propositions appear “only as premise[s] or conclusion[s]” (LS 15); here “this is a piece of wax” is a conclusion that subsumes its object under a universal category. (Deleuze does not offer the standpoint from which denotation would appear as primary but it is obvious enough: the “this-now-here” of sense certainty.)9 Deleuze argues that when we seek the primary relationship we find ourselves in a circle, “the circle of the proposition” (LS 17). None of these relations will function as the principle of the proposition, as the condition of the possibility of the proposition, as the link or relation between the proposition and what is external to the proposition.10

     

    That relation is the fourth dimension of the proposition, sense. It is “the expressed of the proposition . . . an incorporeal, complex, and irreducible entity, at the surface of things, a pure event which inheres or subsists in the proposition” (LS 19). Note that Deleuze reprises Frege’s notion that sense lies in between, though now it lies in between propositions and states of affairs instead of in between ideas and objects. Sense functions as the condition of the possibility of denotation, manifestation and signification (and thus of truth value — but also of paradox), as the linkage between propositions and events and, as such, between ideas and objects. Sense is the “coexistence of two sides without thickness . . . the expressed of the proposition and the attribute of the state of affairs” (LS 22). That is to say that sense is a characteristic of both words and things. It lies in between but is also at the surface of both and identified with neither (it is identified with the event to which I shall return to below).

     

    To a certain extent Deleuze leaves sense undefined and this necessarily so, since the sense of a proposition can never be an object of denotation or signification of the same proposition, as it is always presupposed in denotation and signification (LS 29-30).11 That is, when one makes the sense of a proposition (P1) explicit in another proposition (P2) the second (P2) always has another sense which is itself presupposed and so on in an infinite regress. As such, any proposition that attempts to offer a definition of sense will itself require another sense.12 Moreover, sense is a property of expressions that have no denotation, manifestation, signification or expressions in which these functions miscarry, i.e., absurd and nonsensical statements. We get a clearer idea of sense by seeing how Deleuze distinguishes it from good sense and from common sense and how he links it with nonsense. Good sense is the sense of signification (LS 76). It is the sense that is ordered in one direction only, the sense of linear thinking.13 It is the sense, as Deleuze says, that “foresees” (LS 75), that is able to extrapolate from the present and the past in order to predict the becoming of the future based on past and current models. It is “good” sense precisely because it identifies the past, present and future as the Same, as a repetition of the Same in the face of the Other (a repetition that denies the possibility of the repetition of difference). Common sense is the sense that governs denotation (particularly the application of signification in denotation: this is a piece of wax) and manifestation (LS 77-8). It “identifies and recognizes” (LS 77). It identifies and recognizes both the self, the “I” that manifests, and the things which the self experiences. The two function complementarily as the identity of common sense provides a beginning and end (and thus a direction) for the movement of good sense and the action of good sense in bringing the manifold of experience under the categories of general signification provides the matter without which identity would remain empty (LS 78). Sense, itself, underlies both good and common sense in that it allows for multiple directions other than the one that any particular manifestation of good sense adopts, and, as the virtual ground of all actual identities, it potentially fragments any particular identity formed by common sense.

     

    Nonsense, absurdity, expressions which violate the rules of good and common sense, have sense too, i.e., are sensical and sensible. “A round square” and “I am every name in history” respectively denote an impossible object, equate two inconsistent categories and fragment the identity of the one who speaks. Yet they nonetheless make sense and function expressively. The best example of this is Lewis Carroll’s Jabberwocky:

     

    Twas brillig and the slithey toves Did gyre and gimble in the wabe14

     

    Even prior to Humpty Dumpty’s definition of these terms this poem functions, it expresses . . . something. The notion of sense that Deleuze elaborates is one that grounds the functioning of language in its widest range, that includes nonsense and the absurd rather than excluding such expressions to fit a theory. Nonsense is not the absence of sense; it is sense that fails to result in denotation or signification or manifestation. The import here is that (non)sense15 grounds the possibility of meanings, directions of thought, of research, and modes of presentation that are cut off by the illusory clarity of good and common sense.16

     

    Moreover, because the Jabberwocky makes sense it functions to transport us into the event of the slaying of the Jabberwock. And it is through the event that the second avenue to the realm of sense lies. Before examining Deleuze’s theory of the event it is worth pausing a moment to look at what counts as events. Michel de Certeau says that “the event is first and foremost an accident, a misfortune, a crisis.”17 Writing on Deleuze, Foucault speaks of the event as “a wound, a victory-defeat, death,” the last being the “best example,”18 while in the context of Nietzsche he says it is a “reversal of a relationship of forces” in response to “haphazard conflicts.”19 Deleuze takes a similar position on the event, considering it primarily as some sort of calamity. My point in raising this issue is to note the emphasis in Deleuze’s work since in what follows I will adopt a wider view of what counts as an event. It seems to me that the synchronic state of a science functions as a state of affairs as it is the set of static relations between bodies (theories, methodologies, experimental technologies, laboratory practices, objects of knowledge, etc.) in an immediate present. As such, it will give rise to its own sense/event.

     

    Events are the effects of the interactions of bodies but are not themselves bodily, corporeal (LS 4). Deleuze distinguishes events from states of affairs, which are the static set of relations that bodies, things, are found in at a particular point in time. When bodies interact they produce effects, events, which are not coextensive with themselves, insofar as they are states of affairs, and which do not inhere in the same time. The time of states of affairs is rectilinear time, a time of “interlocking presents,” that flows in a single direction, from past to future but in which, strictly speaking, past and future do not exist except as boundaries of the present (LS 4, 61-2). The time of the event, however, is a time without a present, a time of an unlimited past and an unlimited future, a time that is expressed in the infinitive form of verbs (LS 5, 61-2). To a great extent, the distinction is between the brute existence of physical things (both in themselves and in their static relations to one another) and the subsistence of an incorporeal entity that floats on the surface of things and constitutes the movement and duration of their becoming and of their sense.

     

    Take disease. As a state of affairs we have a relation between two bodies, two organisms, an infectious organism and a human body. At any particular moment in the course of this disease there will be various states of affairs, an infection, the reproduction and multiplication of the microbe, a fever, an immunological response, a recovery, an exacerbation, etc. But the disease as an event does not inhere in the present. What is in the present is, on the one hand, biological interactions between infectious and infected organisms and, on the other hand, malaise, pain, suffering, etc. The disease, however, is always just past, and yet to come, more appropriately, it is always becoming, always expressed in the infinitive of the verb. As Lecercle notes, the actors in the midst of the event do not experience it as the event, as a single identity, even though the event inheres in all of their actions.20 Insofar as we perceive the person with a disease, insofar as we sense her as having this disease, insofar as we treat and investigate her disease our attention is directed to something more than the body before our eyes, our treatment protocols, our instruments and our diagnostic devices, more than the series of bodies that present themselves to the medical gaze. Our technologically extended and enhanced senses are directed to the event of the disease, an event that is manifested in the body in front of us but which is never immediately present to us either temporally or spatially.

     

    This second path to the realm of sense leads through the event because Deleuze equates sense and the event, indeed, sense is a “pure event” (LS 19, cf. 22). Sense and the event both lie in the “in-between” of words and things. They are the same “thing” from different aspects, two sides of a plane without thickness. Each aspect adheres to its respective dimension, sense to words, events to things, and to each other, sense/event. The in-between realm of sense/events is the place, or, rather, “non-place,” in which words and things mingle, rub up against each other, consorting with one another to produce effects. The issue of causality is important here since there are, at least, three series of cause-effect relations. The first series operates at the level of things, bodies producing effects on other bodies, changes in the states of affairs of those bodies (the scalpel that cuts, the organism that infects). The second series is that in which the interaction of bodies produces events (being cut, being sick). These events are ideational or incorporeal entities that have “logical or dialectical attributes” (LS 5), i.e., entities that have sense and which can generate meaning.

     

    The third series is that of the interaction of events themselves, in which events produce effects on each other. The causal relation here is a weak one, Deleuze calls it a “quasi-cause” (LS 6), partly because there is no necessary relation between cause and effect among events, partly because of the difficulty of distinguishing whether the causes that produce the effects in events are those that arise from things or from other events. Insofar as Deleuze depicts events as hovering over things we may describe two horizontal series of causal relations (among things and among events) and one vertical series that flows from things to events.

     

    Following this it seems to me that we can describe two other series of causal relations. The first (or fourth) is the horizontal relation between propositional structures. As Georges Canguilhem says, “theories never proceed from facts . . . [t]heories arise only out of earlier theories . . . facts are merely the path — and it is rarely a straight path — by which one theory leads to another.”21 Lastly, there is a transverse relation that moves from propositional structures to the level of the sense/event in which our ability to make explicit the sense of events can produce effects on meaning (with the proviso that we always presuppose another sense in doing so). It is by this avenue that we may produce transformations in the event itself. However, we must describe these relations as “quasi-causal” in nature because there is no strict necessity in operation that links these causes and effects. That is, good sense is not able to predict the effects of making the sense of an event explicit and common sense is not able to govern the denotation or manifestation of identities that arise as the effects of doing so.

     

    In order to bring this conceptual strategy to bear on the event of AIDS I need to turn to one last notion in Deleuze, that of “actualization.” In a discussion of Henri Bergson’s theory of evolution22 Deleuze opposes the virtual-actual distinction to the possible-real distinction in order to show that actualization is the “mechanism of creation” (B 98). Here, the relation between the possible and the real is attributed to a “theological model of creation” in which the real is simply one of the many possibles, all of which resemble the real, that has been brought into existence.23 Actualization, on the other hand, is the process in which the virtual differentiates itself in the active creation of something new, an actual which does not resemble the virtual from which it arose (B 97). The best example here is the relation between an organism and the genetic code of its DNA. It is through a process of actualization that the virtual structure of a strand of DNA generates an organism, the organism (phenotype) bearing no resemblance to its genotype.

     

    We are now in a position to state the relation between sense/events and the meaning of propositions (denotation, manifestation, and signification as well as what Frege would term reference). Sense is the ground or condition of meaning, and thus of truth, but it is not a ground in the sense that it simply covers a wider range of possibilities, i.e., it does not stand in relation to reference as the possible to the real.24 Instead, it has the relation of virtual to actual, meanings are generated by actualizing lines of difference from sense/events. This opens up a second possibility for transformation, this time the transformation of the propositional meaning of the event. Precisely because meaning does not stand in a relation of resemblance to sense, or to the event, the sense/event grounds multiple possible meanings.

     

    We should note at this point that Deleuze’s notion of the sense/event does not function as either an epistemology or a metaphysics. That is, it does not function as a method for distinguishing between the truth and falsity of a particular proposition or set of propositions. And it does not provide us with a foundation for distinguishing between reality and appearance. Instead, the argument is that for any event, multiple meanings are possible, that the event can be actualized in multiple ways. And this allows for the possibility that the event of AIDS can be actualized in another way than it has been so far. Again, this is why I take Deleuze’s work to be strategic rather than conceptual model building. Rather than offering us a new way to construct the event it shows us the possibility of re-eventualizing the event, of setting it in motion again, of producing a thaw in the frozen river of “knowledge” that has fixed the event along a particular line of actualization.

     

    II. The Sense/Event of AIDS

     

    With the general outlines of this conceptual strategy in place I will now turn to the event of AIDS. What I will show is that the relations of (quasi)causality and lines of actualization of AIDS run through the in-between of sense/events in an extremely complex manner. The essential point here is that AIDS is not a single phenomenon, a repetition of the same, but a multiplicity whose identity is, at best, illusory. Following that I will argue that we must turn our attention to the senses of these events in order to adequately confront them.

     

    My concern here is with the scientific, economic, political and social hegemony of the HIV model of AIDS and the correlative emphasis on the search for a cure/vaccine to the detriment of social measures designed to control the spread of the disease. Since 1984 it has been taken as a fact that HIV is the necessary and sufficient cause of AIDS.25 I say “taken as a fact” not because there are no qualified dissenters from this view but because HIV has become the dominant model in the four registers listed at the beginning of this paragraph to the exclusion of all other possibilities. HIV may well be the sole cause of AIDS (and if we are lucky we will eventually find out whether or not this is the case) but the troubling aspect is that other avenues of research and treatment (not to mention prevention) have been effectively marginalized. Given the stakes, to say “troubling” is to say the least.

     

    The dominance of this model is due to a number of reasons both within and outside the domain of what we nominally call science. “Science” is taken to be that language which accurately represents the world in a universalized system of signification in which signs refer to independent objects and the system of their relations to one another. It appears as an empirical endeavor in which the facts of the matter provide their own conceptual structure by means of revelation to sufficiently rigorous and insightful researchers. While this image has been criticized by a number of authors (e.g., Paul Feyerabend, Foucault, Thomas Kuhn) it remains the dominant model socially, politically, economically and scientifically (by this last I mean that scientists themselves largely retain this image of their work). With regard to AIDS the point is that scientific propositions that identify HIV as the cause of AIDS appear to establish a universal and uncontestable reference free of significant effects of the sense of those propositions, the mode of presentation of those propositions and the mode of presentation of the theories and observations which generate those propositions.

     

    But if Deleuze is right, the always unexpressed sense of these propositions, theories, observations and the multiplicity of correlative and contiguous propositions, what Foucault calls a discursive formation, functions as their ground, as the virtuality from which they are actualized. Let me now turn to what I take that sense or senses, at least in part, to be.

     

    As Donna Haraway has shown, immune system discourse, and correlatively, disease discourse, are structured around the concept of identity and individuality where the primary task of the immune system is the differential identification of Self and Non-self and the defense of the (self-same) individual against foreign intruders.26 Political/military metaphors are not misplaced here as they permeate immune system discourse as they have done the discourse of both disease and the body for at least the last two centuries. On the one hand, epidemics such the one of cholera in Paris in the 1830’s were perceived as foreign invasions (and continue to be: syphilis sent back in the blood of soldiers returning from foreign wars, AIDS is the invasion of the heterosexual community by the gay or drug abusing communities).27 On the other hand, the body’s cells were described as closed, individual organisms with their own borders and identity at both the advent of cellular theory and well into this century.28 The sense of both immune system and disease discourse adheres to the surface of the propositions that deploy the terms Self, Non-self, individual, identity, border, attack, defense.

     

    Moreover, the shift from vitalism/mechanism models of life to the information system model of DNA has not produced any fundamental change in the political/military sense of medicine and biology. All that has changed is the conception of the attack/defense structures. With the development of genetic models of heredity and the advent of DNA, the body (and all other forms of life) becomes the phenotypical expression of a genotype, a code, carried in the recesses of the cells that constitute it. Disease becomes a battle between information systems, those of the body and of the disease organism with a third system, that of medicine, intervening on the side of the body. This sense of disease becomes particularly apparent in both AIDS and auto-immune diseases (e.g., multiple sclerosis, lupus erythematosus). Part of the genetic code is the program for the development of defense mechanisms, the immune system, but precisely because it is a program it carries the possibility of errors occurring both within the code itself and in its translation. Auto-immune diseases (which can be either congenital defects in the code or defects produced by infectious agents or a combination of the two in which a pathogen activates a dormant gene) are caused by “errors” in the code that turn the body against itself in a physiological death drive. In this context HIV appears as an alien infiltrator that invades the body’s most fundamental structure and perverts the code that produces and maintains its identity. If auto-immune diseases are evidence of traitors within the body then HIV appears as a subversive foreign agent that recruits and produces traitors. And it appears as such precisely because of the way the sense/event of medicine and disease has been actualized.

     

    Modern medicine is constituted largely as a discipline of intervention that confronts disease as an entity to be combatted and defeated. For the most part even preventative measures are simply efforts to identify disease at an early stage in order to initiate a counter-attack before a beachhead is secured. This is due both to the dominance of the germ model of disease, disease as an invader, and to the institutional reorganization of medicine that Foucault has dubbed the “birth of the clinic.” The clinic or hospital is where the body is placed in a position of hyper-individuation as it is removed from its socio-environmental context in favor of a controlled, universally reproducible setting in which the environment has no effect on the disease process other than those intentionally produced by medical intervention (in the ideal scenario29) in order to isolate the disease process from all the other processes in which the body is enmeshed. The clinic enjoys a privileged position in the medical community; it is the site of teaching, the site of research, the site with the highest concentration of technology and new treatment modalities, the site where those on the cutting edge of the profession want to be. As such, it becomes the standard, the norm, for the practice of medicine, the treatment of disease.

     

    The production of the ideal, neutral setting in which to isolate and treat diseases and the diseased has as its correlate the construction of the ideal, neutral social environment. The structure of medicine as interventional and the correlative invention of the neutral site for the study and treatment of disease constitutes the body’s environment, insofar as it is of medical interest, as either neutral or threatening. Either the environment acts as a factor or co-factor in the production of disease or it remains neutral. That is to say that social environments only appear as potentially invasive, as alien, to the body insofar as they appear at all as a factor in the generation or transmission of disease. In the social, political and economic structures of the western world the neutral environment (outside the clinic) is the white, bourgeois, suburban and rural domain of monogamous heterosexuals.

     

    Lastly, we may note the long genealogy that has linked sex and sexuality to pathology. As Foucault has ably shown, sex and sexuality have been constituted as harboring within them an always present pathological element that can manifest itself along moral, psychological, and physiological lines in the individual generating a danger to both the individual and the species.30 Sex is an autochthonous danger to the defense of the Self precisely because it is a drive within oneself (one’s Self) that violates the defensive borders of the Self by exposing the body to an Other, to a Non-self that harbors a potential invader. Sexuality is always, at least potentially, a double agent opening the back door of the citadel and admitting foreign insurgents.

     

    These are some of the senses into which the disease we now call AIDS irrupted. The sense/event of AIDS mingles and interacts with the sense/events of medicine, biology, the immune system, sexuality and the environment in the in-between. It is here that it becomes, as Avital Ronnell has said, an historical event rather than a natural calamity.31 As an historical event it is caught up in the genealogy of these other sense/events that allows its propositional determination not only as a viral infection that disrupts the functioning of the immune system but also as an alien invader (whether it be from the “dark continent” or from the [gay and/or promiscuous] “aliens” among us), as moral retribution for abominations of nature, as divine retribution for the same, as “nature’s way of cleaning house,” etc.32 The construction of AIDS as an essentially gay disease (and hence one that affects those undeserving of “our” full social, political, economic and scientific intervention in the cause of eliminating “their” suffering) is not simply the result of imaginations fueled by ressentiment (although this element cannot and must not be ignored). It is a complex of propositions whose ground lies in the realm of sense/events. That is, all of the actualizations of all of the sense/events, all of the propositional meanings that arise from the sense/events, outlined above enter in to the constitution of AIDS as a “gay” disease. Moreover, the search for a singular and self-same cause of the disease elicits the construction of a singular and self-same “alien” presence that imports the disease into “our” midst — despite however illusory both of those identities are.

     

    But this ground in sense/events does not have the relation of resemblance to its current manifestation as the possible does to the real. It is a virtuality, or series of virtuals, from which one line of actualization has been realized. The sense/event(s), along with the mixture of sense/events in which it is immersed, is not determinative of any particular line of actualization in the strong sense. Sense/event as ground of both sense and nonsense, truth functional statements and the absurd, is the ground of multiple avenues of meaning; it does not fix meaning, it enables it (that is, it enables both its fixation and the perversion of that fixation).

     

    At this point, let me return to the question of the dominance of the HIV model of AIDS. Despite the fact that prominent researchers, Robert Root-Bernstein and Peter Duesberg among others, have provided significant evidence and coherent arguments that HIV is not a sufficient, and may not be a necessary, cause of AIDS there has been little research done along the lines that they suggest.33 Indeed, those who have dared to publicly argue along these lines have had their research funds cut off. The reasons for this are multifold. Economically, the HIV model has generated enormous income for the manufacturers of HIV tests and antiviral drugs. Politically, it has allowed governments to claim that they are acting responsibly and to assure a frightened populace that the cause has been found with the concomitant implication that the risk has been decreased, that the scientific will to knowledge continues to have the power to protect them. Socially, it has strengthened the identification of the threat with body fluids of those already marginalized and feared and furthered their exclusion in the interests of the safety of the “general population.” Its hegemony lies in its positing of a singular and identifiable Non-self that functions as an invader and internal insurgent as opposed to multiple-antigen models that propose complex interactions in which no single, and thus identifiable, enemy is present.

     

    To be sure, AIDS research is not entirely monolithic — if it were, neither Roots-Bernstein’s nor Duesberg’s work would be known or published. Nonetheless, such research is marginalized to the extent that the social-political-economic actualization of AIDS has effectively fixed HIV as the necessary and efficient cause. And this actualization functions in a spiral manner insofar as our social, political and economic capital is invested in scientific research on HIV which then provides support for the continuing reinvestment of capital.

     

    Moreover, the hegemony of the HIV model focuses the direction of research toward the discovery of a magic bullet, a cure or vaccine that will overthrow the disease and render it harmless. Because the social environment is presented as either neutral or hostile it appears as something to be defeated instead of a milieu that can be transformed. And as the environment of AIDS has been actualized as sexual in nature, sex becomes an enemy to be defeated either through abstinence or its imprisonment within the legitimized perimeter of monogamous heterosexuality. This mode of presentation has functioned to the detriment of social measures designed to control the spread of the disease by lowering a cone of silence over the discourse of safer sex and IV drug use.

     

    That is to say that the fixation of one line of actualization, the one that runs through HIV, has established this retrovirus as a functional referent for both the popular imagination and the economically and politically legitimized scientific/medical community. It establishes a single meaning of the disease, single direction for research, a single perception of the infected and diseased. And it does so because it is both good sense and common sense, a means of foreseeing the future (hopefully) and a means of identifying the threat. It stabilizes and freezes the event, shifting us from the uncertainty of becoming of the event to the safety of the being of the referent.

     

    Following this it seems to me that there are two ways of thinking about how we can respond to the sense/event. On the one hand, we have the project of counter-actualization.34 By making the sense of the event explicit we return to the virtuality of the sense/event, to the series of virtual singularities that make up the sense/event, in an attempt to allow the formation of new lines of actualization, the formation of new structures of propositional meaning, new designations, manifestations, significations and referents. The sense/event is repeated but as a repetition of difference in place of the repetition of the same. On the other hand, the mobilization of virtual singularities holds open the possibility of transformations at the level of the sense/event itself, at the level of the interactions of the various sense/events that underlie, overlap, and interconnect with the sense/event of AIDS. These two operations are not fundamentally distinct in any manner. Instead, they are two ways of thinking about the mining of sense and the effects it might produce.

     

    To return to the sense/event of AIDS, to the realm of the in-between, is to re-eventualize sense and the event, to set them moving again, to find in its becoming the multiplicity of other possibilities, of other lines of actualization, to other lines of research, to the possibility that AIDS is not the unitary and univocal disease that it is presently constructed as. The means to do so is by taking care of the sense, by mining the realm of sense/events in order to make its sense explicit, by remaining suspicious of the senses we presuppose in making sense of that sense. To do so is to produce, hopefully, shifts in the sense of AIDS, shifts in the mode of presentation of AIDS, shifts in the direction of AIDS and shifts in the meaning of AIDS.

     

    Our project, then, is one of counter-actualization, undoing the lines of actualization in order to re-eventualize the virtual elements of the sense/events. The problem that appears to arise at this point is that of how we are to prevent other noxious lines of actualization, new lines that continue to increase suffering rather than decrease it. But this is a false problem or, more accurately, a bad formulation of the problem that supposes that we have control over the lines of actualization or over sense/events, that our causal interactions are more than quasi-causes whose effects we have the good sense to predict and the common sense to identify and control. But it is precisely the case, as Foucault has shown us so well, that this is the sort of control, the sort of power/knowledge, that we do not have. The best we can do is to pervert the actualizations that we find and wait to see what is actualized in the wake. The tactics and strategies of counter-actualization, of the mining of sense, are those of the nomad, the guerilla fighter, the terrorist. Counter-actualization is a street fight that attacks sedentary blockages and obstacles in order to set things moving again and then waits (im)patiently for new sedimentations, new blockages, new obstacles, new struggles.35

     

    We cannot simply take care of the sense and allow the words to take care of themselves. The Duchess is wrong there. Indeed, taking care of the words is a part of taking care of the sense. And if we do not take care of the sense, the words will surely take care of us.

     

    Notes

     

    I wish to extend my thanks to Constantin V. Boundas for his comments on an earlier version of this paper. My thanks also to Lisa Brawley of Postmodern Culture and the anonymous reviewers for their insightful comments.

     

    1. Lewis Carroll, Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland & Through the Looking Glass (New York: Bantam Books, 1981) 68.

     

    2. Gilles Deleuze, The Logic of Sense, trans. Mark Lester, (New York: Columbia UP, 1990). Hereafter cited in the text as LS.

     

    3. This is, of course, too simplistic. But I leave aside here the reflexive issues of meanings that are about thought, language, meaning itself, etc.

     

    4. Michel Foucault, The Birth of the Clinic, trans. A.M. Sheridan-Smith (New York: Vintage Books, 1975) xi. See also The Order of Things (New York: Pantheon, 1970): the original title of this work is Les mots et les choses.

     

    5. Jean-Jacques Lecercle, Philosophy Through the Looking Glass (La Salle: Open Court, 1985) 92.

     

    6. Gottlob Frege, “On Sense and Meaning,” trans. Max Black, Translations from the Philosophical Writings of Gottlob Frege, ed. Peter Geach and Max Black (Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1982) 56-78, hereafter cited in the text as SR. There is some debate over whether to translate the term “Bedeutung” (as Frege uses it) as “meaning” or “reference.” Following J.N. Mohanty’s practice I shall use “reference” at those places where I do not use both terms. See Husserl and Frege (Bloomington: Indiana UP, 1982) 43-4.

     

    7. Michel Foucault, introduction, The Normal and the Pathological, by Georges Canguilhem, trans. Carolyn Fawcett, (New York: Zone Books, 1989) 8; cf. Foucault, “Theatrum Philosophicum,” Language, Counter-Memory, Practice, ed. Donald F. Bouchard, (Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1977) 175-6. Nor is the philosophy of sense a philosophy of the concept for Deleuze, but of the conditions in which concepts appear.

     

    8. We may note here that, on Frege’s terms, denotation and signification fall under the heading of reference while manifestation is a form of sense.

     

    9. G.W.F. Hegel, Phenomenology of Spirit, trans. A.V. Miller, (New York: Oxford UP, 1977) 58-66. The relation in which the denotation of a pure this breaks down nearly immediately into an dialectic between the I and the this-now-here. See Michael Hardt, Gilles Deleuze: An Apprenticeship in Philosophy (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993) for reasons why Deleuze would ignore Hegel at this point.

     

    10. Philip Goodchild offers a lucid description of this problem in “Speech and Silence in the Mumonkan: An Examination of the Use of Language in the Light of the Philosophy of Gilles Deleuze,” Philosophy East and West 43.1 (1993): 1-18.

     

    11. Lecercle argues that the positive definition of sense is that of a paradoxical element that links the series of signifiers and the series of signifieds, always in excess in the first and lacking in the second. See Lecercle, 101-2, cf. LS 48-51. AIDS is always excessive in the series of signifiers that are deployed around it (see note to Paula Treichler below) and remains lacking in a number of ways as a signified.

     

    12. This creates what in Platonic scholarship is known as the third man problem. One might argue that despite this sense could still be defined. However, I take Deleuze to argue that sense is an aleatory function that cannot be captured in any proposition precisely because it cannot be contained within language.

     

    13. See Rene Descartes, Discourse on Method, in particular Part 3 in Discourse on Method and Meditations on First Philosophy, trans. Donald Cress (Indianapolis: Hackett Publishing Co., 1980), 12-7.

     

    14. Carroll, Looking Glass 117.

     

    15. Cf. Difference and Repetition, trans. Paul Patton (New York: Columbia UP, 1994) 64, on non-being. Nonsense, on this view, is not the negation or absence of sense but sense as a problematic.

     

    16. One might well wonder at this point what nonsense has to do with the event of AIDS, particularly with the scientific and medical aspects of the disease. What the history of science shows us is that propositions that had denotations or significations (or referents) in the past (under previous paradigms or in previous discursive formations) no longer have those referents. Moreover, and perhaps more importantly, propositions that currently have referents did not have them in the past. Foucault points out that Gregor Mendel’s statements regarding hereditary traits were not truth-functional in 19th century biology (“Discourse on Language,” The Archaeology of Knowledge, trans. A.M. Sheridan-Smith [New York: Pantheon Books, 1972] 224). They were taken to be absurd or nonsense and in the context of the dominant scientific theories of the day they were just that, even though they are presently not only truth functional but, to a certain extent, true. My point is that sense and nonsense function at a level prior to what Foucault would describe as the underlying order that structures an episteme. This is why I have not referred to Foucault’s discussion of the in-between in The Order of Things, xx-xxi.

     

    17. Michel de Certeau, “History: Science and Fiction,” Heterologies: Discourse on the Other, trans. Brian Massumi (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1986) 205.

     

    18. Foucault 173-4.

     

    19. Foucault, “Nietzsche, Genealogy, History”, Language, Counter-Memory, Practice, 154.

     

    20. Lecercle 98.

     

    21. Georges Canguilhem, A Vital Rationalist, ed. Francois Delaporte, trans. Arthur Goldhammer (New York: Zone Books, 1994) 164. Italics in the original.

     

    22. Gilles Deleuze, Bergsonism, trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjam (New York: Zone Books, 1988). Hereafter cited in the text as B.

     

    23. John Rajchman, Philosophical Events (New York: Columbia UP, 1991) 160.

     

    24. Cf. Deleuze, Difference and Repetition, 153.

     

    25. Mirko Grmek, History of AIDS, trans. Russell Maulitz and Jacalyn Duffin (Princeton: Princeton UP, 1990) 68.

     

    26. Donna Haraway, “The Biopolitics of Postmodern Bodies: Constitutions of the Self in Immune System Discourse,” Simians, Cyborgs and Women: The Reinvention of Nature (New York: Routledge, 1991) 203-30.

     

    27. See Francois Delaporte, Disease and Civilization, trans. Arthur Goldhammer (Cambridge: MIT Press, 1986); and Susan Sontag, Illness as Metaphor and AIDS and its Metaphors (New York: Anchor Books, 1990).

     

    28. Canguilhem 168.

     

    29. This is of course an ideal as there are always nosocomial infections, to name but one unintended effect.

     

    30. Michel Foucault, The History of Sexuality, Vol. I: An Introduction, trans. Robert Hurley, (New York: Vintage Books, 1980).

     

    31. Avital Ronnell, “A Note on the Future of Man’s Custodianship (AIDS Update),” Public8 (Toronto: Public Access, 1993) 56.

     

    32. See Paula Treichler, “AIDS, Homophobia, and Biomedical Discourse: An Epidemic of Signification,” AIDS: Cultural Analysis, Cultural Criticism(Cambridge: MIT Press, 1989) 31-70, for a discussion of the multiplicity of meanings that have been generated around AIDS.

     

    33. See Robert Root Bernstein, Rethinking AIDS: The Tragic Cost of Premature Consensus (New York: The Free Press, 1993). Let me note here that there are serious problems with the sense of Root-Bernstein’s own argument which tends to portray certain sexual activities as inherently dangerous. Nevertheless, the multiple-antigen-mediated-autoimmunity (MAMA) model answers a number of questions that HIV model does not, in particular why some individuals have been infected with HIV for over ten years without developing AIDS or any symptoms thereof.

     

    34. I take this term from Constantin Boundas.

     

    35. One of the most remarkable examples of this sort of activity is the activity of ACT-UP (AIDS Coalition to Unleash Power). See Douglas Crimp and Adam Rolston, AIDS DemoGraphics (Seattle: Bay Press, 1990).

     

  • “God has No Allergies”: Immanent Ethics and the Simulacra of the Immune System

    Adrian Mackenzie

    Sydney University
    adrian.mackenzie@philosophy.su.edu.au

     

    “[T]he science of life always accommodates

    a philosophy of life.”1

     

    Conventional approaches to bioethics long for a purified set of principles in order to guide the application of scientific knowledges of the body — the life sciences — to individual “cases.” In the realm of bioethics, the possibility that these knowledges might themselves constitute entities such as the individual, or the possibility that the individual body might itself be something other than the more or less governable a-historical object of technoscientific action, awakens a kind of horror autotoxicus. Nor do the prevalent modes of ethical discourse react kindly to the possibility that the “living” body of an individual is also a self, an actor within a complicated set of narratives, codes and apparatuses whose various registers — medical, economic, racial, sexual, religious, and so on — intersect. In short, conventional bioethical discourses refuse to acknowledge that, as Emmanual Levinas has written, “the body is a permanent contestation of the prerogative attributed to consciousness of `giving meaning’ to each thing; it lives as this contestation.”2

     

    Traditional bioethics disappoints us insofar as it overlooks the ways the body contests the prerogatives of consciousness, contests reason and self-identity. Instead of opening onto the possibility of divergent ethea, bioethics’ universalizing adjudicative principles legitimate the biomedical normalization of differences by trying to deal only with the moral rights of the rational self and by leaving the differing character of embodiment — a most profound aspect of the ethical habitat — aside. In its separation of scientific theory and “ethical” practice, and in its unwillingness to transit any borders into the epistemological territory of science, conventional bioethics misapprehends the active and ambivalent role of technoscientific intervention, an intervention which both produces these crucial differences in embodiment and participates in their effacement. Traditional bioethics allergically responds to the ethical issue — the maintenance of ethos, of embodied differences, of the character and habits of individual bodies.

     

    Bios: nomó

     

    "Now it is over life, throughout its
    unfolding,
    that power establishes its dominion."3

     

    Foucault’s well-known description of a shift during the last two centuries from sovereign to disciplinary power or “bio-power” implies a displacement in the substance of ethics.4 In diverse discourses and domains, it becomes increasingly obvious that the presumed exclusion of ethics from the theoretical-pragmatic complex of science itself, from the very concrete operations and forces of technoscientific discourses engaging living bodies, significantly limits the relevance and effectiveness of the traditional notion of ethics.5

     

    As Donna Haraway describes it, “the power of biomedical language . . . for shaping the unequal experience of sickness and death for millions is a social fact deriving from on-going heterogeneous social processes.” 6 The morality-displacing power of biomedical discourse and practice does not confine itself to sickness and death, but branches out into the normalization of whole populations. At many different scales and under different aspects — birth, death, sexual relations, work, fitness, stress, leisure, and so on — life is targeted by the vectors of biomedical intervention.

     

    Again, Foucault makes this point succinctly when he writes of the emergence of bio-power: “For the first time in history, no doubt, biological existence was reflected in political existence; the fact of living was no longer an inaccessible substrate that only emerged from time to time; amid the randomness of death and its fatality; part of it passed into knowledge’s field of control and power’s sphere of intervention.”7 The propagation of bio-power — designating “what brought life and its mechanisms into the realm of explicit calculation and made knowledge-power an agent of transformation of human life”8 — powerfully challenges any responsive ethics to address the realm of physiology and to reframe the ethical substance to include the embodiment of biomedical materiality. In other words, so-called “physiological” or “biological” questions increasingly raise ethical issues in ways that cannot be disentangled from the historical conditions of life as a locus of power relations or, conversely, solved through an a-historical ethico-moral calculus. Under the auspices of bio-power, biological knowledge increasingly presents itself as the ground of self-realization and governance in relation to life in general. It is difficult to suggest a more obvious example of the explicitly biomedical complications of ethics than the response to HIV/AIDS over the last decade: the rhetorics of defence and exclusion comprehensively blur the borders between scientific representations of disease and the institutional and “ethical” responses.

     

    In the course of this translation, which constitutes biology as an object of power, a concomitant conceptual and representational shift has occurred in biological understandings of the body. “The body,” as the object of biomedical discourse, no longer displays the hierarchical unity of organs and structures which projected it as subject to the rational self, master of its own self-reflexive truth, the presupposed self of traditional ethical codes. In a shift that correlates with the shift from sovereign power centered on the speaking, judicative subject to the statistical, dispersed technological networks of disciplinary power, the living body can no longer be thought of as the “unambiguous locus of identity, agency, labour,” as Haraway stresses in her reading of the immune system as “icon.” Rather, the living body is symbolized and operated on as “a coded text, organized as an engineered communications system.”9 From the standpoint of bio-power, it is difficult to decide where, if not everywhere in the corpus of life, difference and identity reside. Certainly it no longer gravitates towards the constellation of reason as consciousness of self.

     

    Hence two inter-related problems are at hand: (i) the need to dislocate the locus of ethical concern so that it is not simply excluded from the discourses of science, or confined to the instrumental regulation of their application; (ii) the issue of how to formulate such a relocated ethics when the new locus of embodiment turns out to lack stability because it “emerges as a highly mobile field of strategic differences.”10 Together they suggest that an ethics of embodiment must concern itself with the attempts of biomedical discourses exhaustively to code differences. Such an ethics calls for an account of the irreducibility of individual differences that goes outside the traditional assumption of independent selves standing in the solitary light of reason, illuminated by transcendent interior values. At the same time, if we seek differences conducive to heterogenous ethea in the face of ever-extending processes of bio-political normalization, we cannot rule out the possibility that strategic zones of difference reside within science itself.

     

    Immunity and alterity

     

    In the context of immunology the major stake is indeed the irreducible difference and self-identity of individuals. A contemporary textbook of immunology asseverates:

     

    The central question in immunology has always been, How can the immune system discriminate between “foreign” and “self.”11

     

    Immunology proffers itself as the science of bodily self and non-self recognition. Varela and Anspach write: “[W]hat is the nature of the body identity when a syndrome such as AIDS can cause its breakdown? This leads us directly to the key phenomenon of body identity: the immune system.”12 Haraway also cites a number of reasons why the study of the immune system stands out as an exemplary and strategic site in the biomedical coding of differences. First, immunological discourse increasingly tries to determine who or what counts as the “general population.”13 The diagnosis of HIV-AIDS has, for instance, created a new population group with different legal, insurance and employment status to the general population. In a more direct negotiation of differences, immunology now supplies anthropological field study with the means to conclusively determine ethnic groupings.14 As an already fertile field of biotechnological activity, the practical importance of immunology continually grows as the technology of monoclonal antibodies infiltrates diverse industrial, diagnostic and agricultural practices.

     

    Secondly, Haraway proposes that the immune system be viewed as representative of the denaturing processes mentioned above which have translated the body into an explicitly decentered and dynamically structured object. She writes: “My thesis is that the immune system is an elaborate icon for the principal systems of symbolic and material `difference’ in late capitalism.”15 The use of the word “system” is not incidental in this context because one of Haraway’s main concerns is to show how biomedical representations of bodies now resort to the conceptualities of signal and logic derived from communication “systems.”16 Immunology, according to Haraway, is one of the principal actors in the re-staging of the body as a biotechnological communications system.

     

    The corporeal negotiations of material differences carried by the immune system intimately determine what is properly one’s own body; they regulate a body open to and capable of responding to an indefinite variety of “others” — living, non-living, or on the borderline between the living and the dead (e.g. viruses). Thus we can identify a particularly apt biomedical figuration of “ethical” interest in the immunological figuration of the self, where “practically all molecules in the universe are antigens,” 17 that is to say, where almost any kind of matter potentially elicits an immune system response, and where there is no simple borderline between what is foreign and what is recognized as belonging, no simple dividing line between between drug and toxin, nourishment and parasite.

     

    The triumph of an icon of the self: the self as icon

     

    How can the promise of an ethics which does not place itself beyond the material effects of a biomedical discourse such as immunology be fulfilled? In what mode would ethics permeate the supposedly value-resistant fabric of the science of immunology? By dwelling less obsessively on values and orienting itself more towards an ethics understood as “a typology of immanent modes of existence.”18 The natural properties of bodies are steadily being diversified and complicated by immunologically sophisticated organ transplants, prosthetics, pharmaceuticals, by practices of corporeal grafting and by all the inflorescences of matter to which the flesh is currently heir. If it wishes to account for the specificities of ethea — the dwelling places of living things — for the character, habits and habitat of localized bodies, ethics must begin to register the contours of difficult terrains such as the immune system on a map of embodied difference.

     

    In part, as I have said, ethics must show how biomedical discourses such as immunology actively produce rather than merely describe differences. Can the biomedical sciences be shown always to be doing more than describing the origin of bodily differences? Can they also be seen as actively elaborating differences? If they can, we may assume that immunology not only describes how the immune system differentiates and secures self from other, but that immunology, in constituting a self immunized against others, also performs an ethically charged immunizing operation. (Certainly an obsession with severing obligation or connection to others runs strongly through the isolating treatment accorded to people infected with HIV-AIDS.) Counter to Haraway’s thesis that the immune system is an icon of symbolic and material differences, immunology could be read as a discourse of immunity which attempts, as the Latin root immunis suggests, to free or exempt the self from obligation to others.

     

    Immunology, like nearly every science, does indeed present itself as “merely representing” rather than actively producing differences between self and non-self within the contemporary social field. In this sense it remains, along with most other sciences, Platonist. But unlike many other sciences, immunology explicitly allies itself with Platonism — the Western tradition’s most persistent and wide-ranging discourse on representation and the judgment of representation — in its foundational paradigm, the Principle of Clonal Selection. Because this foundation is no longer even questioned by immunology it is not, as Golub’s textbook points out, referred to as clonal selection theory but merely as Clonal Selection.19 Experiments do not test this foundation; they only test hypotheses consistent with it. Clonal Selection purports to explain how the body’s immune system is able to discriminate and respond to “foreign” material (antigen):

     

    Antigen does not instruct the immune system in what specificity to generate; rather, it selects those cells displaying a receptor of the appropriate specificity and induces them to proliferate and differentiate, resulting in expansion of specific clones of reactive cells.20

     

    The “founding father” of this theory, Niels Jerne, conveyed Clonal Selection in the following terms:

     

    Can the truth (the capacity to synthesise antibody) be learned? If so, it must be assumed not to pre-exist; to be learned it must be acquired. We are thus confronted with the difficulty to which Socrates calls attention in Meno (Socrates, 375 B.C.), namely that it makes as little sense to search for what one does not know as to search for what one knows; what one knows one cannot search for, since one knows it already, and what one does not know one cannot search for since one does not even know what to search for. Socrates resolves this difficulty by postulating that learning is nothing but recollection. The truth (the capability to synthesise an antibody) cannot be brought in, but was already inherent.21

     

    Can this overlapping of the Clonal Selection theory and the Platonic theory of knowledge as a recollection which needs nothing from the outside and which is exempt (immune) from obligation to the unknown be regarded as anything more than a fascinating but purely rhetorical invocation of a philosophical text as metaphor? Yes, if it can be shown that the Platonic investment descends beyond the play of `mere rhetoric’ into the deep structure of immunological theory, or, more significantly, that the rhetoricity of this Platonic explanation of the possibility of an immunological self could not be completely expelled from the body of immunological theory.

     

    A logic of decontamination

     

    In “Plato and the Simulacrum,” Gilles Deleuze claims that the founding motive of Platonism has always been the effort to secure the domain of representation on a model of Sameness. The dialectic and myths of Plato’s texts are read by Deleuze as providing a founding model for distinguishing and selecting proper claimants from false claimants. Proper claimants are copies which have some claim to truth, knowledge and the Good because of their internal resemblance to the Idea on which they are modelled; false claimants constitute the simulacra whose apparent resemblance to truth and the Good conceals an “interiorized dissimilarity.”22 This founding model is thus designated as the model of Sameness. Only representations or copies that have an internal relation to the essential Idea of the Good, beauty, or virtue possess the authentic resemblance or Likeness which delineates the domain of philosophical representation. I will return to the issue of the simulacra and the false claimants to be excluded because of the absence of any proper relation to the Same. But first, I would roughly contextualize Jerne’s fortuitous encapsulation of the foundation of immunology in Platonic terms within the broader framework of Platonism.

     

    Varela and Anspach are explicit: “Formulated another way, the organism learns to distinguish between self and nonself during ontogeny”.23 The idea of knowledge as recollection of the differences inscribed earlier (during embryogenesis) is understood as the immunological parallel to the immortality of the soul which Plato consistently introduces into his texts under the guise of a myth. These myths claim that only because the soul (and by analogy, the immune system), prior to its current embodiment (that is, during embryogenesis), has contemplated the eternal Forms or Ideas beyond the mundane world, can knowledge approximate in recollection the Truth which the soul has seen (that is, one’s body can recognise what belongs to it and what is other). While the myths of the Phaedrus, Symposium, Republic, Statesman and Meno which present the eternal life of the soul might all be regarded as interruptions or digressions in the course of the dialectic, Deleuze argues that the ironic play at evasion (the myths are always explicitly advertized as heuristic fictions by Socrates) only conceals the deeper motive of methodically dividing the faithful claimant from the false claimant in order to protect a line of succession from Same to Like. “The myth, with its constantly circular structure, [i.e. souls circulating between mundane and extra-mundane life, contemplating the Forms in eternity] is really the narrative of foundation.” 24 It permits the claims of representations to be founded by determining which claimants may share in that which the unsharable, imitated Idea possesses firsthand: eternal, unchanging Being. Without that share, claimants are nothing but those impostors known as simulacra.

     

    The philosophical schema and principle of selection of Platonism — and hence of any knowledge system such as immunology which purports simply to describe or represent differences — can thus be formulated as “only that which is alike differs.” The Same always returns, insofar as it generates good copies, faithful imitations, paternally authorized by the logos of reason. It instates a hierarchy descending from the Same to Like, from being towards becoming. (Hence the hierarchy of copies of the bed — idea, artifact, painting — to be found in Book X of The Republic, 596b-602b.) The method of recognition and selection by division constitutes “an exact definition of the world as icon.” 25 This world-schema, within whose parameters science at least sometimes moves, does more than represent what is known. It actually selects or excludes various copies and representations on the grounds of their affiliation or non-affiliation to Sameness. The mundane world, a body, or an immune self is thereby selected and affirmed as an icon or good representation of that which it copies: the Same.

     

    In this respect, Haraway’s ascription of iconic status to the “material-semiotic actor” of the immune system shares in the Platonism of the determinations of self she so cogently reads in the text of immunology. If the immune system is read as an icon of difference, it pictorially represents more or less truthfully an imitated referent which exists elsewhere. Read as icon, the immune system is condemned to remain within the hierarchical lineage of good or truthful claimants in the domain of mimetic representation.26 In its allegiances to Platonism, this is also the operation of the immune system as constituted by immunology in its fundamental problematic of self and non-self. The immune system, insofar as it is governed by Clonal Selection (and insofar as it can be represented in the very ideal of a system), is said to function in order to exclude anything whose claim cannot be traced through a lineage of recognizable likeness founded in the complex genetic locus known as the Major Histocompatibility Complex (MHC).27 The immunizing operation of immunology transpires through a theory that faithfully copies the Platonic operation of selecting among claimants, of bringing differences within a hierarchy of models and copies dominated by the model of the Same.

     

    This way of looking at the immune system (and the world) has always cost dearly: it tends to preclude any relation with the outside other than the allergic. Indeed Derrida has argued that for Platonism in general, the

     

    immortality and perfection of a living being would consist in its having no relation at all with any outside. That is the case with God (cf. Republic II, 381b-c). God has no allergies. Health and virtue . . . , which are often associated in speaking of the body, and analogously, of the soul (cf. Gorgias, 479b), always proceed from within.28

     

    In conformity with Clonal Selection, immunological research privileges processes of selection that expel internal differences. Through an innumerable series of mouse-obliterating grafts, transplants, exchanges, extractions, and the patient isolation and exclusion of immunological diversity through selective breeding (for instance, the “nude mice,” lacking a thymus, often used in immunological work), immunologists have begun to map the complex molecular interactions of the immune system in terms of “marks” or coded traces. The guiding assumption: all the principal immune system cells involved in the immune response can recognize molecular markers on other cells, and these markers — MHC antigens — are elaborated by or refer back to genes in a certain region of the individual’s MHC gene complex. No proper immune response against antigens is to be expected unless all the participating cells display appropriate markers of self derived from the same genetic source. Indeed this attribute is now accepted as the operational basis of self in the immune system, although as Golub admits, “we do not now how non-reactivity to self is maintained.” 29 MHC restriction entails the Platonic provision that the immune system can only react to “foreign” by recollecting an older, interior “self,” ultimately sourced in genetic coding. Unless “foreign bodies” are accompanied by the markings of “self,” they will pass unnoticed. The immune system’s reaction to antigens is therefore not an absolute barrier against all comers, but a selective response: only those outsiders who can be marked as “foreign” by self-identical MHC markers will elicit a response. Like the soul who has gazed on the truth prior to the earthly phase of its cycle, immunology has argued that the system’s marking begins prior to the body’s nativity (during embryogenesis MHC markers are already starting to mark every cell in the body as self 30) and gradually accretes a memory of alterity through exposure to the infinite variety of antigens.

     

    Difference within?

     

    In the Platonic world, the domain of faithful representation is demarcated and defended by the methods of selection and exclusion which determine the legitimacy of the copy or the representation by either establishing its hierarchical position in relation to the model of the Same or excluding it from knowledge and reality altogether. Similarly the general orientation of immunology has been towards understanding the immune system as maintaining a defended bodily self, brought about through processes which recognized antigens related to the same MHC and dealt with foreign (allogenic) bodies marked as without an internal resemblance to the same by reacting defensively against them. This approach, carried out by the Platonic method of division and selection, is reproduced both in the inscriptive practices of immunology — the carefully controlled breeding of immunology’s laboratory mice essentially ensures that all offspring-copies are purged of hidden genetic differences — and in the theoretical formulation of the hierarchical mechanisms of cellular interaction in the immune system: the mnemic self of Clonal Selection. Clonal Selection in conjunction with MHC restriction distinguishes those claimants with proper internal resemblances from the diseased, pathogenic and purely factitious resemblances presented by antigens. A false claimant — a simulacrum — within the field of recognition of the immune system initiates the proliferation of good copies (antibodies in particular) which will expunge interiorized dissimilitude.

     

    This Platonist commitment of immunology, although it permeates contemporary immunology and therefore needs to be taken into account, does not fully saturate it. Another dynamic is operative there, and it threatens the overthrow of Platonism. Deleuze expresses it directly as “only differences are alike.”31 Another possible reading of the immunological potentialities of the body can be linked to this other-than-Platonic rendering of the world. Jerne, who formulated the strongly Platonic motif of Clonal Selection which we have been following, also proposed a reading of the immune system that threatens the unity and telos of the system and the model of the Same it is employed to support. The network theory describes a regulation of immune response in which Clonal Selection would be undercut by the incessant reverberations of internal differences.

     

    The theory specifies that all possible antigens of the outside world are able to be recognized by the immune system because they reverberate with interactions between elements internal to the immune system. Because every antibody within the system can interact with every other in a straightforward antigen-antibody reaction, i.e., every antibody can potentially mimic an antigen for some other antibody, the immune system will function through an unceasing cascade of internal responses. Of the roughly ten million or so different antibodies of the body (each antibody responds to a single specific type of antigen), “a vast number of responses are going on all the time, even in the absence of foreign antigen.”32 The equilibrium state of the immune system is a highly dynamic balance generated in a continual flux of differential relations. Antigens, ostensibly pathogenically entering the body from the outside world, are internally imaged by antibodies acting as defacto antigens. The immune system is capable of responding to the immense diversity of natural antigens because the part of the antigen (the epitope or antigenic determinant) internally imaged by an antibody acting as antigen (in this role, it becomes an idiotope) is shared by a relatively large number of epitopes. The confrontation with a foreign body takes place not in the mode of a defensive mobilization but in terms of a reverberation or resonance with some element of the system already sounding its own glissando of response. Varela and Anspach write:

     

    [T]he immune system fundamentally does not (cannot) discriminate between self and nonself. The normal function of the network can only be perturbed or modulated by incoming antigens, responding only to what is similar to what is already present.33

     

    An epitope would normally attract the response of a number of antibodies (an antibody acting as antibody in the network is called a paratope) because only part of it is imaged by a particular idiotope, and conversely, a specific paratope would most likely not be the only possible response to the epitope. A proliferating number of never fully equivalent paratopes respond to any particular epitope.34

     

    In consequence, the humoral “self” maintained by the immune system in responding to foreign bodies would not be a matter of selection and exclusion according to criteria of internal relation to identity. Rather the identity of immune “self” would be produced as the effect of internal reverberations of disparate elements. The introduction of differences from the outside would thus effect nothing more than an amplification of certain reverberations already in play. As Haraway puts it:

     

    In a sense, there could be no exterior antigen structure, no “invader” that the immune system had not already “seen” and mirrored internally.35

     

    The difference in response between “foreign” and “self” would be measured by the degrees of this quantitative amplification. The network theory implies that the immune system includes within itself the angle or point of view from which differences and distinctions between self and others are made, rather than having division imposed from above by a principle of selection based on resemblance to a foundational identity. Thus, the immune response (insofar as it concerns the generation of antibodies) takes on that very same simulacral aspect which Platonism has always, according to Deleuze (and Derrida), sought to exclude:

     

    In short, folded within the simulacrum there is the process of going mad, a process of limitlessness . . . a constant development, a gradual process of subversion of the depths, an adept avoidance of the equivalent, the limit, the Same, or the Like: always simultaneously more and less, but never equal.36

     

    Interpreted as a simulacral entity, the immune system functions on the basis of internal disparities rather than on the basis of an internal likeness derived from a mnemic-genetic self. What immunology in its most explicitly Platonist inspiration regards as the recognition of external differences, can be understood as a sign that “flashes between two bordering levels, between two communicating series,”37 a prolongation of the on-going interaction that is the functioning of the network. Immunology’s admission that “it is possible for an individual to make a productive antibody response against its own idiotypic [i.e. uniquely marking the individual] determinants” 38 shows that (lymphocytically expressed) self-identity cannot be the ultimate foundation of the immune response against which all claimants, foreign or otherwise, are to be measured. Rather, the work of the simulacrum is a production of resemblances — between inside and outside, idiotopes and epitopes — through the resonance of divergent series. The effect of resemblance arises because the simulacrum (the sign generated between communicating series) “includes within itself the differential point of view.”39 These resemblances can no longer be selected on the basis of their hierarchical position in relation to the Same, because the system operates so as to render the notion of hierarchy between Same and Likeness infinitely reversible. There can be no order of model and successively degraded copies because everything — the resemblances, the relation between elements — begins in differences, in mobility, not in the sharing of an unsharable Same.

     

    Exclusion and selection of difference

     

    We ourselves wish to be our experiments and
    guinea pigs.40

     

    How, in the pursuit of “resemblances” between Platonism and the dominant immunizing strain of immunology, between the overthrow of Platonism and a largely latent simulacral immunology, can biomedical ethics begin to assert the primacy of an ethical concern affirmed as embodiment or ethos?

     

    The locus of ethical concern is ineluctably drawn into considering embodiment by virtue of the increasingly refined and comprehensive investments staged by bio-power around the management of living bodies. Immunology is likewise confronted by a disintegration of the underpinnings of its disciplinary object — the immune system considered as a mode of self-identity. In the case of immunology, any bioethics that recognized the constitutive effects of biomedical discourses and practices in producing the self would have to accommodate an equivocal production: the simultaneous naturalizing of bodies as a self modelled on interior Sameness and the denaturing of bodies across a mobile and contingent field of communicating but divergent series of differences. On the one hand, through the “myth” of a remembered exposure to identity (Clonal Selection) maintained by exclusion and division, immunology affirms Platonism and lays down the laws of an immune system belonging to a world bound by the hierarchy of Same and Like, defended against representations without the proper internal resemblance. On the other hand, the problem of the regulation of the immune system’s response produces an inversion of the principle of hierarchy, a mirroring confusion of borderlines between inside and outside and a corresponding complication of the lines between self and nonself. While the Platonic motif suggests an attempt to maintain a bodily order and integrity in the face of the chaos threatening from the outside, against the foreigners that might insinuate themselves, the anti-Platonic motif — read sympathetically — suggests the possibility of subverting the drive to master chaos by allowing resemblance and recognition only through internal dissimilitude, through the constantly decentered responses of divergent series.41

     

    Aligning immunology to “whatever, in scientific practice, has always already begun to exceed the logocentric closure,”42 entails two principal but uncertain outcomes. First, the simulacral impulse in immunology uproots any single identifiable locus in which, finally and with certainty, the immune self could be located. In addition, the ethical substance of the immune self would, in the interplay of divergent series of mirrorings and reverberations between disparate elements placed in contact, appear as in experimental relation to alterity rather than as a conclusive ordering of likeness and divergence.

     

    The primary characteristic of such an experimental orientation would be to augment the legions of nude mice and hybridomas currently employed by immunological laboratories with a version of the self able to affirm the complication within itself of heterogeneous series through real experience, whether this be of infection, disease, auto-immune reactions, allergies, grafts, transplants and so on. It is precisely the internal reverberation of divergent series that characterizes the simulacrum, and, I would argue, the simulacral processes of the network theory of immunity. In constantly generating a plethora of paratopes in response to the endless variety of idiotopes, the cascading activity of the immune system unravels any putative identity or unity of the embodied self. Reframing the deracinated bodies of contemporary biomedical discourse within an ethical anti-Platonism enables an immunological ethics that neither severs obligations to others (since its regulation would take the form of a “resonance” between differences that cannot be definitively divided according to interior Self and exterior Other) nor defends an immured self through a self-assertion that always regards differences as allergic.

     

    The ethos of a self inhabited by interior differences would be more like the “window of vulnerability” that Haraway speaks of: a mode of dwelling in which boundaries between individuals are hard to fix (this is not to say there are no boundaries, only that they are complicated), in which inside and outside are traversed by a non-identical self generated in the scintillations and reverberations of divergent series. Immunology thus suggests that ethics need not begin and end in the privilege of an immune self.

     

    Moreover, if this self inhabited by differences is to assert itself over the iconic self, it cannot maintain the immune system (contrary to Haraway’s reading) or any other systematization of living bodies as an icon of symbolic or material differences. Read as icon, any system, no matter how de-naturalized or differential in its operations, stands ready for re-incorporation in the world of representation, along with all the distinctions (model/copy, essence/appearance) and exclusions mobilized there. It is precisely this world, the world of representation, that the simulacrum calls into question by showing that the resemblance and identity which purportedly legitimize the icon are the outward effects of perhaps small internal differences. Not selection, but the simulation of resemblance and identity; not hierarchy, but the “condensation of coexistences.”43 Under these conditions, the ethos appropriate to the biopolitically-sensitive immune self would not seize on postmodern icons but would evaluate sameness as the always contingent resonances and harmonics of divergent series.

     

    Notes

     

    1. Jacuqes Derrida, “Autobiographies: The Teaching of Nietzsche and the Politics of the Proper Name,” The Ear of the Other, trans. C. McDonald, ed. P. Kamuf (Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 1988) 6.

     

    2. Emmanuel Levinas, Totality & Infinity, trans. A. Lingis, (Pittsburgh: Duquesne UP, 1969) 129.

     

    3. Michel Foucault, The History of Sexuality, trans. R. Hurley, (Hammondsworth: Penguin Books, 1981) 138.

     

    4. Foucault 139-140.

     

    5. Two papers about bioethics strongly influence this discussion: Rosalyn Diprose, “A `Genethics’ that makes sense?” in R. Diprose & R. Ferrell, eds Cartographies: Poststructuralism and the Mapping of Bodies and Spaces, (Sydney: Allen and Unwin, 1991); and Donna Haraway, “The Biopolitics of Postmodern Bodies: Determinations of Self in Immune System Discourse,” Differences, 1.1 (Winter, 1989).

     

    6. Haraway 1.

     

    7. Foucault 142.

     

    8. Foucault 143.

     

    9. Haraway 14.

     

    10. Haraway 15.

     

    11. Golub, Edward S., Immunology : A Synthesis (Sinauer Associates, 1987) 416.

     

    12. Varela, Francisco and Mark Anspach “The Body Thinks: The Immune System in the Process of Somatic Individuation” in Materialities of Communication, trans. W. Whobrey, eds. H.U. Gumbrecht and K.L. Pfeiffer (Stanford: Stanford UP, 1994) 273.

     

    13. Haraway 37.

     

    14. Golub 67.

     

    15. Haraway 2.

     

    16. Haraway 14-16.

     

    17. Golub 380.

     

    18. Gilles Deleuze, Spinoza: Practical Philosophy, trans. R. Hurley (San Francisco: City Lights Books, 1988) 23.

     

    19. Golub 1.

     

    20. Golub 1.

     

    21. Golub 9.

     

    22. Gilles Deleuze, “Plato and the Simulacrum,” October Winter 1983: 49.

     

    23. Varela 278.

     

    24. Deleuze 46.

     

    25. Deleuze 52.

     

    26. See Deleuze, 47-48.

     

    27. “Each person has a group of genes, the major histocompatability complex or MHC, which codes for self-antigens.” See L. Sherwood, Human Physiology: From Cells to Systems (St Paul: West Publishing Company, 1989) 391. Self-antigens mark each one of a person’s cells, thereby allowing the recognition of cells as proper to the individual. A more technical explanation states: “MAJOR HISTOCOMPATIBILITY COMPLEX (MHC). Mammalian gene complex of several highly polymorphic linked loci encoding glycoproteins involved in many aspects of immunological recognition, both between lymphoid cells and between lymphocytes and antigen-presenting cells.” See The New Penguin Dictionary of Biology, 8th ed. (Hammondsworth: Penguin Books, 1990) 340. Also see, for an even more disconcertingly technical explanation: Golub chap. 17.

     

    28. Jacques Derrida, “Plato’s Pharmacy,” Dissemination, trans. B. Johnson, (Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1981) 101-102.

     

    29. Golub 481. For that matter, non-reactivity to self isn’t always maintained, as the multifarious auto-immune reactions show.

     

    30. Golub 222, 421.

     

    31. Deleuze 52.

     

    32. Niels Jerne, quoted by Golub 384. Haraway 22-23 provides a clear explanation of the network theory.

     

    33. Varela 283.

     

    34. This diversity of possible responses to a given epitope is accentuated by the fact that “antibodies seem to recognize the three-dimensional configuration and charge distribution of an antigen rather than its chemical make-up as such.” The New Penguin Dictionary of Biology 33.

     

    35. Haraway 23.

     

    36. Deleuze 49.

     

    37. Deleuze 52.

     

    38. Golub 386.

     

    39. Deleuze 49.

     

    40. Friedrich Nietzsche, The Gay Science, trans. W. Kaufmann (New York: Vintage, 1974) S319.

     

    41. On these different relations to chaos, and the connection they have with two different types of Eternal Return, the Platonic and Nietzschean, see Deleuze, “Plato and the Simulacrum” 54-55.

     

    42. Jacues Derrida, Positions, trans. A. Bass (Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1981) 36.

     

    43. Deleuze 53.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Deleuze, Gilles. “Plato and the Simulacrum.” October (Winter 1983): 43.
    • —. Spinoza: Practical Philosophy. trans. R. Hurley. San Francisco: City Lights Books, 1988.
    • Derrida, Jacques. “Otobiographies: The Teaching of Nietzsche and the Politics of the Proper Name,” The Ear of the Other. trans. P. Kamuf, ed. C. McDonald. Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 1988.
    • —. “Plato’s Pharmacy.” Dissemination. Trans. B. Johnson. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1981.
    • —. Positions. Trans. A. Bass. Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1981.
    • Diprose, Rosalyn. “A ‘Genethics’ that makes sense?” Cartographies: Poststructuralism and the Mapping of Bodies and Spaces. Sydney: Allen and Unwin, 1991.
    • Golub, Edward S. Immunology: A Synthesis. Sinauer Associates, 1987.
    • Haraway, Donna. “The Biopolitics of Postmodern Bodies: Determinations of Self in Immune System Discourse.” Differences 1.1 (1989).
    • Nietzsche, Friedrich. The Will to Power. Trans. W. Kaufmann. New York: Vintage Books, 1968.
    • —. The Gay Science. Trans. W. Kaufmann. New York: Vintage Books, 1974.
    • Scott, Charles E. The Question of Ethics. Indiana UP, 1990.
    • Sherwood, L. Human Physiology: From Cells to Systems. St Paul: West Publishing Company, 1989.
    • Varela, F. and M. Anspach. “The Body Thinks: The Immune System in the Process of Somatic Individuation.” Materialities of Communication. Trans. W. Whobrey. Eds. H. U. Gumbrecht and K. L. Pfeiffer. Stanford: Stanford UP, 1994.

     

  • Women Writers and the Restive Text: Feminism, Experimental Writing and Hypertext

    Barbara Page

    Vassar College
    page@vassar.edu

     

    It was while reading my way into a number of recent fictions composed in hypertext that I began to think back on a tendency of women’s writing which aims not only at changing the themes of fiction but at altering the formal structure of the text itsel f. In a useful collection of essays about twentieth-century women writers, called Breaking the Sequence: Women’s Experimental Fiction, Ellen Friedman and Miriam Fuchs trace a line of authors who subvert what they see as patriarchal assumptio ns governing traditional modes of narrative, beginning with Gertrude Stein, Dorothy Richardson, and Virginia Woolf, and leading to such contemporaries as Christine Brooke-Rose, Eva Figes, and Kathy Acker. They write:

     

    Although the woman in the text may be the particular woman writer, in the case of twentieth-century women experimental writers, the woman in the text is also an effect of the textual practice of breaking patriarchal fictional forms; the radical forms — nonlinear, nonhierarchical, and decentering — are, in themselves, a way of writing the feminine. (3-4)

     

    Among contemporary writers, women are by no means alone in pursuing nonlinear, antihierarchical and decentered writing, but many women who affiliate themselves with this tendency write against norms of “realist” narrative from a consciousness stirred by f eminist discourses of resistance, especially those informed by poststructuralist and psychoanalytic theory. The claim of Friedman and Fuchs cited above is itself radical, namely that such women writers can produce themselves — as new beings or as ones p reviously unspoken — through self-conscious acts of writing against received tradition. A number of the contemporary writers I discuss in this essay make a direct address within the fictive text to feminist theory, rather more as a flag flown than as a definitive discursive marker, in recognition of themselves as engaged with other women in the discursive branch of women’s struggle against oppression.1For some writers of this tendency, hypertext would see m to provide a means by which to explore new possibilities for writing, notwithstanding an aversion among many women to computer technologies and programs thought to be products of masculinist habits of mind. My argument is not that the print authors I d iscuss here would be better served by the hypertext medium, but that their writing is in many respects hypertextual in principle and bears relation to discourses of many women writers now working in hypertext.

     

    These women writers, as a rule, take for granted that language itself and much of canonical literature encode hierarchies of value that denigrate and subordinate women, and therefore they incorporate into their work a strategically critical or opposit ional posture, as well as a search for alternative forms of composition. They do not accept the notion, however, that language is hopelessly inimical or alien to their interests, and so move beyond the call for some future reform of language to an interv ention — exuberant or wary — in present discourses. I focus in particular on writers whose rethinking of gender construction enters into both the themes and the gestural repertoire of their compositions, and who undertake to redesign the very topograp hy of prose. At the most literal level of the text — that of words as graphic objects — all of these writers are leery of the smooth, spooling lines of type that define the fictive space of conventional print texts and delimit the path of the reader. Like other postmodernist writers, they move on from modernist methods of collage to constructions articulating alternatives to linear prose. The notion, for example, of textuality as weaving (a restoration of the root meaning of “text”) and of the constr uction of knowledge as a web that has figured prominently in the development of hypertext has also been important in feminist theory, though for rather different purposes.2 Like other postmodernist writers, also, many of these women experimentalists are strikingly self-reflexive, and write about their texts in the text. One important difference, though, concerns the self-conscious will among these writers not simply to reimagine writing as wea ving but rather to take apart the fabric of inherited textual forms and to reweave it into new designs. For all of these authors, restiveness with the fixity of print signifies something more than a struggle going on under a blanket of established formal meaning. Their aim is to rend the surface of language and to reshape it into forms more hospitable to the historical lives of women and to an esthetic of the will and desire of a self-apprehended female body that is an end unto itself and not simply ins trumental. One frequent mark of this new writing is the introduction of silence, partly as a memorial to the historical silencing of women’s voices, but also as a means of establishing a textual space for the entrance of those “others” chronically exclud ed from the closed texts of dogmatists and power interests.

     

    As my point of departure, I want briefly to describe Carole Maso’s 1993 novel, AVA, her fourth book in order of composition, though published third. This text unfolds in the mind of a thirty-nine-year old professor of comparative literat ure named Ava Klein, who is dying of a rare blood disease, a form of cancer. The book, divided into Morning, Afternoon and Night, takes place on the last day of Ava’s life, the same day in which President George Bush draws his line in the sand of the Per sian Gulf states, inaugurating a war. Against this act and all the forces of division and destruction it symbolizes, against the malignancy of cancer and of militarism, Maso poses the unbounded mind of Ava, whose powers of memory and desire abide in the emblematic figure of a girl, recurring throughout the text, who draws an A and spells her own name. Ava’s narrative is in fragments that in the act of being read acquire fuller meaning, through repetition, through their discrete placement on the passing pages, through variation, and also through the generous space between utterances that gives a place to silence and itself comes to represent a certain freedom — of movement, of new linkage, of as-yet-unuttered possibilities. Here is how the book begins:

     

                        MORNING
    
    Each holiday celebrated with real extravagance.  Birthdays. In-
    dependence days.  Saints' days.  Even when we were poor.  With
    verve.
    
    Come sit in the morning garden for awhile.
    
    Olives hang like earrings in late August.
    
    A perpetual pageant.
    
    A throbbing.
    
    Come quickly.
    
    The light in your eyes
    
    Precious.  Unexpected things.
    
    Mardi Gras: a farewell to the flesh.
    
    You spoke of Trieste.  Of Constantinople.  You pushed the curls
    from your face.  We drank Five-Star Metaxa on the island of Crete
    and aspired to the state of music.
    
    Olives hang like earrings.
    
    A throbbing.  A certain pulsing.
    
    The villagers grew violets.
    
    We ran through genêt and wild sage.
    
    Labyrinth of Crete, mystery of water,
    home.

     

    In a polemical preface to AVA, Maso argues that much of current commercial fiction, in attempting to ward off the chaos and “mess” of death with organized, rational narratives, ultimately becomes “death with its complacent, unequivocal tr uths, its reductive assignment of meaning, its manipulations, its predictability and stasis.” In this preface, Maso traces her resistance to traditional narratives back to feelings of dissatisfaction with the “silly plots” of stories her mother read alou d to her as a child. In order to stop “the incessant march of the plot forward to the inevitable climax,” she would, she recalls, wander away, out of earshot, taking a sentence or a scene to dream over. Often she would detach the meanings from the words her mother read, turning the words into a kind of music, “a song my mother was singing in a secret language just to me.” Bypassing the logos of stories, then, she walked into a freer space where she was able to invent, or rediscover, another tempo and o rdering of language felt as a sensuous transmission from the mother’s body to hers. “This is what literature became for me: music, love, and the body.” (From AVA 175-76)

     

    This is the beginning, but not the end or sum of Maso’s fiction. Rather like Adrienne Rich’s “new poet” in her “Transcendental Etude,” she walks away from the old arguments into a space of new composition, where she takes up fragments of the already spoken with a notable lack of anxiety about influence. In the stream of her narrative one hears formal and informal voices of precursors and contemporaries, male and female, along with patches of fact, history, even critical discourse that figure as feat ures of the rhythmic text, the writing of a richly nourished adult mind — Ava Klein never more alive than on the day of her dying:

     

    García Lorca, learning to spell, and not a day too soon.
    
    Ava Klein in a beautiful black wig.  Piled up high.
    
    And I am waiting at what is suddenly this late hour, for my ship to
    come in --
    
    Even if it is a papier-mâché ship on a plastic sea,
    after all.
    
    We wanted to live.
    
    How that night you rubbed "olio santo" all over  me.  One liter oil,
    chili peppers, bay leaves, rosemary.
    
    And it's spaghetti I want at 11:00 A.M.
    
    Maybe these cravings are a sign of pregnancy.  Some late last-minute
    miracle.  The trick of living past this life.
    
    To devour all that is the world.
    
    Because more than anything, we wanted to live.
    
    Dear Bunny,
           If it is quite convenient we shall come with our butterfly
           nets this
    Friday.
    
    You will have literary texts that tolerate all kinds of freedom --
    unlike the more classical texts -- which are not texts that delimit
    themselves, are not texts of territory with neat borders, with
    chapters, with beginnings, endings, etc., and which will be a little
    disquieting because you do not feel the
    
    Border.
    
    The edge.
    
    How are you?  I've been rereading Kleist with great enthusiasm and I
    wish you were around to talk to and I realize suddenly,
    
    I miss you. (113)

     

    For Ava, thinking and feeling go together, and reading is sensuous, rendering literal the definition of influence, so that whole passages of her text — still unmistakably her own — are washed in the colors of an admired author: Woolf, García Lorca, Beckett, and others. Ava’s reading is finally a species of her promiscuous engorgement with life, and of a mind that declines to wall off speaking from writing or to isolate recollection, narration and description from meditation and analysis. In the passage above, for example, a snatch of a letter to Edmund Wilson (“Bunny”) from the lapidary lepidoperist Nabokov stands next to a bit from Hélène Cixous that graphically tails off into broken borders which in turn begin to enact an ex pansion of the text of the sort that Cixous calls for. The book, curiously, achieves unity in the act of reading, as the rhythmic succession of passages induces a condition approaching trance. The effect is both aural and visual: when spoken, real time must pass between utterances; when read, real space must be traversed by the eye between islands of text.

     

    In an essay that itself intermingles argument and reflection with quotation from her own novels and from precursor writers and theorists, Maso points to images that both ground her ambition and suggest alternatives to linear prose: “AVA c ould not have been written as it was, I am quite sure, if I had not been next to the water day after day. Incorporating the waves.” And, “The design of the stars then in the sky. I followed their dreamy instructions. Composed in clusters. Wrote const ellations of associations.” Attributing independent will to genres, she describes the “desire” of the novel to be a poem, of the poem to be an essay, of the essay to reach toward fiction, and “the obvious erotics of this.” (Notes 26) The desiring text r ebels against the virtual conspiracy between “commodity novelists” and publishers to lock a contrived sense of reality, shorn of its remoteness and mystery, into “the line, the paragraph, the chapter, the story, the storyteller, character.” As a lyric ar tist in large prose forms, Maso explains that

     

    Writing AVA I felt at times . . . like a choreographer working with language in physical space. Language, of course, being gesture and also occupying space. Creating relations which exist in their integrity for one fleeting moment and then are gone, remaining in the trace of memory. Shapes that then regather and re-form making for their instant, new relations, new longings, new recollections, inspired by those fleeting states of being. (Notes 27)

     

    She names as precursors Virginia Woolf of the Waves and Gertrude Stein, in Stein’s remark, “I have destroyed sentences and rhythms and literary overtones and all the rest of that nonsense. . . .” (28, 27) In place of plot she aims to “imagin e story as a blooming flower, or a series of blossomings,” for example, and makes space in the text for “the random, the accidental, the overheard, the incidental. Precious, disappearing things.” (27) And here the italicized words, from the secon d section of AVA, both incrementally repeat a line from the opening of the book — “Precious. Unexpected things” — and underscore the ethical, as well as esthetic impulse in Maso’s fiction. (AVA186)

     

    For Maso, the attraction of the novel is its unruly, expansive refusal of perfection. She argues that, because we no longer believe that the traditional stories are true, we can no longer write tidy, beginning-middle-end fiction, even if this means t hat we must “write notebooks rather than masterpieces,” as Woolf once suggested. (Notes 29) The gain will be “room and time for everything. This will include missteps, mistakes, speaking out of turn. Amendments, erasures, illusions.” Instead of the “r eal” story, we shall have: “The ability to embrace oppositional stances at the same time. Contradictory impulses, ideas, motions. To assimilate as part of the form, incongruity, ambivalence.” (Notes 30) And for Maso, who has the confidence to found ima gination on her own experience, this form of fiction, that does not tyrannize and that allows “a place for the reader to live, to dream,” leads not to the “real” story but to “what the story was for me”: “A feminine shape — after all this time.” (Notes 3 0, 28)

     

    In an essay that is something of a tour-de-force, entitled “:RE:THINKING:LITERARY:FEMINISM: (three essays onto shaky grounds),” poet and theorist Joan Retallack, like Maso, addresses what is — or can be — of particular import for women in the refiguration of writing toward non- or multi-linear, de- or re-centered prose, by means of a revaluation of the terms traditionally affixed to the subordinated figure of the feminine:

     

    An interesting coincidence, yes/no? that what Western culture has tended to label feminine (forms characterized by silence, empty and full; multiple, associative, nonhierarchical logics; open and materially contingent processes, etc.) may well be more relevant to the complex reality we are coming to see as our world than the narrowly hierarchical logics that produced the rationalist dreamwork of civilization and its misogynist discontents. (347)

     

    In thinking about why for her the writing of women today seems particularly vibrant with potential, Retallack underscores the worth both of productive silence, that gives place to the construction of new images and meanings, and of collaboration, that emp owers writer and reader to “conspire (to breathe together) . . . in the construction of a living aesthetic event.” (356) While denying a turn toward essentialism, she argues that the historical situation of women now provides a particularly fertile “cons truction site” for new writing, one important feature of which is its invitation to the active participation of others in an ongoing textual process:

     

    I’d like to suggest that it is a woman’s feminine text (denying any redundancy), which implicitly acknowledges and creates the possibility of other/additional/simultaneous texts. This is a model significantly different from Bloom’s competitve anxiety of influence. It opens up a distinction between the need to imprint/impress one’s mark (image) on the other, and an invitation to the other’s discourse . . . (358. My italics)

     

    Against those feminists who despair of entering a language over-coded with misogyny, Retallack argues that “Language has always overflowed the structures/strictures of its own grammars,” and that “The so-called feminine is in language from the start.” (37 2) In this regard, Retallack supplies a validation of Maso’s ready, unanxious introduction of quotation from male authors in what she calls her feminine text.

     

    That prose writers like Maso and poet/theorists like Retallack do not stand alone is indicated, for example, by the 1992 anthology entitled Resurgent: New Writing by Women which has been co-edited by Lou Robinson and Camille Norton . It brings together a generous selection of writers who mix genres of verse and prose freely and embed manifesto or critique both in the narrative and the topography of the writing. Resurgent is divided into two, or perhaps four, pa rts — “Transmission/Translation” and “Collaboration/Spectacle” — as it moves from single-author texts to collaborative and to performative texts. Lou Robinson writes in the introduction:

     

    Everywhere in these prose pieces I find that unpredictable element in the language which forces consciousness to leap a gap where other writing would make a bridge of shared meaning . . . , a sense of something so urgent in its desire to be expressed that it comes before the words to say it, in the interstices, in the rhythm: Marina Tsvetaeva’s “song in the head without noise.” . . . This is writing that swings out over a chasm, that spits. (1)

     

    Among the most interesting pieces in Resurgent are the collaborations, including one by Daphne Marlatt and Betsy Warland, entitled “Reading and Writing Between the Lines,” that undertakes a punning reclamation of the term “collabor ation” itself. Their endeavor resembles that of Retallack, when she reclaims the word “conspire” by reminding readers of its root meaning as “to breathe together” and applies it to the notion of opening the authorial text to the discourse of others. In their piece, Marlatt and Warland, “running on together,” write their way through the self-betrayal of collaboration in its political sense to a celebration of co-labial play, in the lips of speech and of women’s sex:

     

    'let me slip into something more comfortable'
    					she glides across the
    room
    labi, to glide, to slip
    
    (labile;  labilis:
    labia;	labialis)
    				la la la
    'my labyl mynde...'
    labilis,  labour,  belabour,  collaborate,  elaborate
    
    . . . . .
    
    slip of the tongue
    
    				'the lability of innocence'
    
    . . . . .
    
    				 labia majora (the 'greater lips')
    				 la la la
    							and
    						labia minora
    				      (the 'lesser lips')
    not two mouths but three!
    slipping one over on polarity
    
    						slippage in the text
    you & me collabi, (to slip together)
    labialization!)
    slip(ping)  page(es)
    like notes in class
    
    o labilism o letter of the lips
    o grafting  of our slips
    labile lovers
    'prone to undergo displacement in position or change in nature,
    form, chemical composition;  unstable'

     

    This word play owes most, perhaps, to Irigaray’s feminist displacement of the phallus as the central signifier in the sexual imaginary, particularly as articulated in Lacan. In “This Sex Which Is Not One,” she writes: “Woman ‘touches herself’ all the time, and moreover no one can forbid her to do so, for her genitals are formed of two lips in continuous contact. Thus, within herself, she is already two — but not divisible into one(s) — that caress each other.” (24) Although Irigaray’s language is open to the criticism that it may lead to biological essentialism, we should bear in mind that all language is shot through with metaphors, many derived from the body, and that some of the boldest interventions by innovative women writers have been throu gh an insistence on speaking the body in new terms as a way of breaking the hold of traditional discourses that denigrate and demonize the female body. This is a move against a crippling inheritance of ideology, as Nicole Ward Jouve points out: “The whol e idea of sex talking is itself symbolic, is itself discourse; the phrase is a turning around and reclaiming of ‘male’ discourse.” (32) It is also a move, as we have seen in Maso, toward the discovery, in material forms commonly associated with th e feminine, of structures capable of inspiring new forms of writing. For collaborative writers Marlatt and Warland, the co-labial slippage between two and one opens the text to a commingling of voices about the unsanctioned commingling of women’s bodies, thus enacting a double subversion of the Lacanian Law. The effect is not that of reductive essentialism but rather of the frank erotics Maso refers to, an imaginative discursive enactment of the “desire” of one text for another.

     

    At some points in Marlatt and Warland’s text two voices march down separate columns of type in a way reminiscent of Kristeva’s antiphonal essay-invocations,3 but at others, they merge into pronominal ha rmony and a playful syntactic break-up, reminiscent of Stein, that shakes loose the overdetermined subject:

     

    to keep (y)our word.  eroticizing collaboration we've moved from treason
    into trust.  a difficult season, my co-labial writer writing me in we
    while we
    are three and you is reading away with us --
    
    who?
    
    you and you (not we) in me and	      are you trying to avoid the auto-
    all of us reading, which is what      biographical? what is 'self' writ-
    we do when left holding the	      ing here? when you leave space
    floor, watching you soar with	      for your readers who may not
    the words' turning and turning	      read you in the same way the
    their sense and sensing their	      autobiographical becomes com-
    turns i'm dancing with you in	      munal even communographic in
    the dark learning to trust that       its contextual and narrative
    sense of direction learning to	      (Carol Gilligan) women's way of
    read you in to where i want to go     thinking -- and collaborating.
    although the commotion in
    words the connotations you
    bring are different we share the
    floor the ground floor meaning
    dances on . . .

     

    The verbal strategies here are familiar enough to contemporary readers: the deconstructive questioning (whose is (y)our word?) that exposes the instability of subject and object; the reclaiming of terms and unmaking of conventional syntax; the diologism o f the blocked texts. The antiphonal effect of the double columns in fact puts eye-reading into crisis, just as, conversely, the broken, parenthesized, multiplication of signifiers baffles a single voice reading aloud in sequence. Unlike many collaborati ve writers, Marlatt and Warland refuse to distinguish between their two voices by use of a different type face or placement on the page. In Maso’s AVA, influences naturalize and borders among texts break; in Marlatt and Warland, collaboration undermines the notion of writing as intellectual property: we cannot tell where one leaves off and the other begins. It is no coincidence, I think, that prose of this kind floats in generous, unconventional volumes of space, seeking escape, it would seem , from the rigid lineation and lineage of the print text.

     

    Just as the potential for self-circling narcissism in Maso’s text is overcome by an ethics of regard for the external world, so similarly in many of the texts in Resurgent is celebratory subjectivity matched by an engaged politics, even — in Charles Bernstein’s words — by the “need to reground polis,” through “an act of human reconstruction and reimagining.” (200) Some, like co-authors Sally Silver and Abigail Child, directly link self-renovation with revolutionary politics, as when they urge women to “defeat coherent subjectivity on which capitalism, idealism is based.” (167) For others, though, political positioning has been made difficult by the very fragmentation of the culturally constructed self, owing to a painful severa nce from a home base. In Resurgent, the editors’ decision to select “Melpomene Tragedy” from Theresa Hak Kyung Cha’s Dictee highlights this phase of alienation and the yearning it engenders. In this chapter of her book, Cha writes from exile in America to her mother in South Korea and from a cultural dislocation caused by war that is felt as the separation of the self from a machine-produced screen image. In half-broken syntax, she makes a fervent and bitterly ironic ap peal to the traditional female personification of tragedy to intervene against the war machine that invented and shattered her:

     

    Arrest the machine that purports to employ democracy but
    rather causes the successive refraction of her none other than
    her own.  Suffice Melpomene, to exorcize from this mouth the
    name the words the memory of severance through this act by
    this very act to utter one, Her once, Her to utter at once.
    She without the separate act of
    uttering.

     

    In Cha’s Dictee, each chapter enunciates through formal and visual means a distinctive matter, often contrapuntal or even contradictory to that in other sections of the book. Its method of including writing in several languages and visua l artifacts from East and West, and its experimental form in fact led scholars of the 1980’s who were gathering the heritage of Asian American writing to shun Dictee for a time, as lacking ethnic integrity. The composition escapes the bounda ries of a single cultural identity, just as its form steadily resists confinement within the print book. As scholar Shelley Sunn Wong explains, Dictee “instantiates a writing practice that stumbles over rather than smoothes out the uneven te xtures of raced and gendered memory.” (45) At the very front of the book, for example, before the title page, appears a photograph of Korean graffiti etched in stone on the wall of a Japanese coal mine, by one of many workers forced into exile and labor. The words read in translation:

     

    Mother
    I miss you
    I am hungry
    I want to go home.

     

    Wong regards Cha’s placement of this text — the only words in Dicteein the Korean language — that reads vertically from right to left, ending at the extreme lefthand margin, as a provocative move against conventional writings and readings that encode and enforce oppressive hierarchies: “Instead of leading the reader into the work, the directional movement of the frontispiece begins to usher the reader back out of the text. Within the context of narrative development, the frontispiece thus functions not to forward the narrative but, rather, to forestall it.” (46)

     

    The tendencies of the kind of writing I have been describing receive fresh realization in the medium of hypertext. One of these, a collaborative fiction called Izme Pass, by Carolyn Guyer and Martha Petry, seems particularly congruent wi th those in Resurgent, both in its politics and in its formal concerns. Izme Pass came about as the result of an experiment in writing proposed for the journal Writing on the Edge. The editors first asked hy pertext novelist Michael Joyce, best known for his hyperfiction Afternoon, to compose a story. Then they invited other authors to revise or augment his text into a collaboration. Carolyn Guyer and Martha Petry, each of whom had been at work on a hyperfiction of her own, took up the challenge but refused to accept Joyce’s fiction, called WOE, or a memory of what will be, as a prior or instigating text. Recognizing a patriarchal precept in the positing of a master text, they set about to create an independent construction that would also transgressively subvert and appropriate WOE. (79) In an on-screen map they placed a writing space, containing fragments of Joyce’s text, into a triad with spaces containing parts o f their own works-in-progress, then added a fourth, new work, called “Pass,” woven of connections they created among the other three texts to produce an intertextual polylogue:

     

    (Image)

     

    As Guyer and Petry explain: “Almost immediately we began to see how this process of tinkering with existing texts by intentionally sculpting their inchoate connections had the ironic effect of making everything more fluid. Izme Pass bega n to affect Rosary [Petry’s work] which poured its new character back into Quibbling [Guyer’s work] which flowed over into WOE and back through Izme.” (82) At the level of textual organization and of st ructural metaphor, Izme Pass mocks WOE, which graphically emanates from a “Mandala,” an Asiatic diagram for meditation supposed to lead to mystical insight:

     

    (Image)

     

    Instead, they designed a diamond- or o- or almond-shaped map headed by a “Mandorla,” the Asiatic signifier of the yoni, the divine female genital:

     

    (Image)

     

    Appropriations and revaluations of the sort illustrated here constitute critique as an internal dynamic of this hypertext. Because it is written in the Storyspace program, however, Izme Pass takes the further step of opening itself to in terventions by readers turned writers, who can if they choose add to, subtract from, or rearrange the text. In this respect, the politics of hypertext allows for one realization of the feminist aim articulated by Retallack: it provides “an invitation to the other’s discourse.” It pushes further those disruptions of the “real” story Maso calls for, allowing for effects of the sort she lists, including “missteps, mistakes, speaking out of turn. Amendments, erasures, illusions.” Like all hypertexts, Izme Pass prohibits definitive reading; the reader chooses the path of the narrative. The graphical device of notating linked words, moreover, sometimes introduces further narrative possibilities. Opening Izme Pass through its title , the reading begins with this figure of a female storyteller:

     

    When a woman tells a story she is remembering what
    will be.  What symmetry, or assymetry, the story
    passes through the orifice directly beneath
    the wide-spread antlers, curved horns of ritual at her head,
    just as it passes through the orifice between her open
    legs.  Labrys.	How could she not know?
    
    When a woman tells a story it is to save.  To husband
    the world, you might say.  Thinking first to save
    her mother, her daughter, her sisters, Scheherazade
    tells, her voice enchanting, saving him in the bargain.
    
    When a woman tells, oh veiled voice, a
    story.

     

    In Izme Pass, words linked to other texts can also signify in the passage on-screen. Here, for example, the linked words a story; passes through; passes through; mother; daughter; her sisters; saving him in the bargainyield a narrativ e surplus, becoming syntactic in themselves and creating resonant juxtapositions. In this case, the linked words sketch an incipient story having many “passes,” constellated around a family of women, that predicates the saving of a man.

     

    Proceeding into the text through the word “story” itself, on a first pass one arrives at a text space under the title “stones,” that gives a definition of “cairns” and suggests one metaphor — or several — for communal story-writing:

     

    Cairns: the cumulative construction of heaps of stones by
    passers-by at the site of accidents, disgraces, deaths,
    violence, or as remembrances (records) of journeys.
    
    It is as if the stones in their configuration, in the years of
    their leaning against one another, learn to talk with one
    another, and are married.

     

    Nested in the “stones” box at the map level is an assemblage of writing spaces that themselves graphically depict a sort of cairn and produce a textual neighborhood, so to speak, of thematic materials associatively linked to the notion of stones:

     

    (Image)

     

    Such a rich site as this offers a host of possibilities to the reader. I might for example linger at the level of this screen to examine the variety of materials gathered into the cairn. Or I might choose a text and follow the default path where it leads , out of this screen to other locations in Izme Pass. If I choose to click on “Stonestory 1,” at the center of the cairn, I am transported abruptly to a narrative line: “She said, When I was little I held stones up to my crotch to feel the coldness.’” Following the default path from this space, I navigate next to a space titled “a wedding,” containing this text:

     

    Beside her groom, the cool stone closed tightly in her palm.
    Just before the ceremony he had given her a small jade
    butterfly, signal of his intent.  He wanted to learn her, and
    one of the first things he knew was that jade was her
    stone.
    
    Piedras de ijada, stones of the
    loin.

     

    And then after that to a space titled “delight”:

     

    His.  Delight.	Is what she seeks.  In this shade which
    she herself creates, his mind turned inward, she might
    hold him in her palm so, brief reprieve.
    
    Another, he says.  Again.

     

    Another click on the default path returns me to “Stonestory 1,” establishing a tight narrative circle that I realize has moved me swiftly through ritual passages of a female eroticism that has been symbolically associated with and mediated by stones. Deciding at this point to investigate the adjacent “Stonetory 2,” I navigate into the prophetic speech of a woman, here again unnamed: “She said, In order to move mountains you’ve got to know what stones are about.’” The default path in this case issues outward into a journal entry about a sort of female Demosthenes, with the words “She gathered a pearl in her mouth, an O within an O . . . ,” and then on to a screen entitled “Scheherazade,” one of Izme‘s key figures, I realize, recalling th e “stories” text with which my reading began. Backtracking to the journal entry about “an O within an O,” I take note of the growing significance of circles in Izme, and decide to revisit a screen I had previously encountered in my survey o f the cairn, entitled “salt,” and I read:

     

    The alchemical symbol was the same for water as for
    salt (representing the horizon, separation and/or
    joining of earth and sky)
    
    symbol of purification and rebirth
    
    tastes like blood and seawater, both fluids identified
    with the womb

     

    Within this configuration of Izme‘s texts, circles have produced associations among: the form of a woman’s body, rituals of sexual passage, prophetic speaking, female storytelling and, here, a mystical perception of cosmic order. Becau se I am exploring Izme as an open text, that is, one that allows, even encourages, the reader to intervene as a writer,4 I now decide — unthinkable in one too well-schooled in reading closed pr int texts — to make a link and add a new text, by joining the O motif to the passage I quoted above in this essay, from Irigaray’s “This Sex Which Is Not One.” But where to place it? In order to answer this question, I find myself attending more closel y than I might otherwise do to how the structure of Izme and its thematic nodes interact. Finally, I decide simply to nest my new text within the salt, so to speak, by dragging a writing space I create into the interior of the “salt” space, linking it to the Irigaray passage from the alchemical symbol on a path that I name “like lips”:

     

    In all of the texts under discussion here, there is a dynamic relation between feminist thematics and textuality, a relationship that intensifies in a hypertext such as Izme Pass, with its complex interweaving of disparate writings and it s invitation to the reader to move freely both among texts and between texts and syntactic maps. Not all hypertexts by women are as unconstrained or open as those, like Izme Pass, although many nevertheless contain aspects of what one might call hypertextual feminism. Judy Malloy’s lyrical fiction its name was Penelope, for example, presents only a handful of choices at any given moment of reading, through labels that may be clicked on to carry the reader into sections titled ” Dawn,” “Sea” (subdivided into four sections: “a gathering of shades,” “that far-off island,” “fine work and wide across,” “rock and a hard place”) and “Song.” Because the text screens of the “Dawn” and “Sea” sections have been programmed by the computer to produce a sort of random rearrangement with each successive reading, the contexts and nuances of any given passage change with different readings, even though one’s movement through a sequence is relatively linear. Though restrictive by comparison wit h Izme Pass, the structure Malloy adopts strengthens the analogy she intends between the text screens we read and the photographic images her artist-protagonist, Ann Mitchell, is trying to work into assemblages.

     

    The “it” named Penelope in Malloy’s fiction is a toy sailboat, the inciting image of her strategic reconsideration of the Odyssey. In her story, Anne Mitchell, though a weaver of images like her wifely forebear, does not stay put but rather wends her way through relationships and sexual liaisons, evading “That Far-Off Island,” Malloy’s version of Calypso, on which, Malloy remarks in her introductory Notes, “[i]n these days, some married women artists feel trapped.” (11) Penelope’s compounded, disjun ctive structure corresponds with and seems to arise from the narrator’s restless splitting off of attention, under the opposed attractions of sexual and esthetic desire:

     

    That Far-Off Island
    On the telephone he told me a story
    about working in an ice cream store
    when he was 14 years old.
    I looked through the box of photos that I keep by my bed
    while I listened.

     

    Repeatedly in the narrative, the pursuit of art draws Anne away from a lover and the “island” of monogamous, domesticated sex:

     

    That Far-Off Island
    We were looking at contact sheets in his kitchen.
    My coffee sat untouched in the center of the table.
    Where his shirt was unbuttoned,
    dark hairs curled on his chest.
    I got up and began to put the contact sheets
    back into the manilla folder.
    “I have to go,” I said.

     

    Unlike its classical antecedent, Malloy’s Penelope is spare rather than expansive, made of vignettes rather than continuously developed action or panoramic description. Malloy, however, argues that Penelope, a narrabase, as she calls it, is not stream of consciousness, like parts of Joyce’s Ulysses, though it does bear a resemblance, she believes, to Dorothy Richardson’s Pilgrimage, “that strove to be the writing equivalent of impressionist painting ,” just as Penelope “strives to be the writing equivalent of the captured photographic moment. . . .” (Notes 13) The analogy between the on-screen texts of Penelope and sequences of photographs prompts the reader’s reflection up on the nature of each medium. A photograph can be read as a composed image of visual objects removed from time and stilled into permanence, or as a momentary arrest of motion in time, pointing back toward a just-gone past and forward to a promised future . Similarly, though the lines of any on-screen writing are set (at least in a read-only text), and may seem as isolated as a single photograph found on the street, in the varied sequences one reads, the words of a text screen float on a motile surface, p oised for instantaneous change into another, not fully predictable writing.

     

    In light of this interrelation of theme and structure in Penelope, Malloy’s decision to set the texts in “Song” — which tells a partial tale of a love affair — into a fixed sequence nudges the reader to consider how this differently des igned episode relates to the rest of the fiction. “Song” offers something of a romantic idyl, and something of a threat to Malloy’s edgy contemporary woman artist, fearful that sexual desire may lead her to yield to a man who would fill all of her space and time with his demand for her attention and care. And so the set sequence of “Song,” threaded through with images of a recording tape that is ravelled and rewound, comes to an end that allows either for a replay of its looping revery, in accordance wi th the textual program, or instead to a new departure, either through the active agency of the narrator within the fiction, who takes up the instrument of her work, or of the reader, who reaches out for a selection other than [Next]:

     

    Song
    Across the brook,
    three teenage boys sat on a rock,
    drinking beer.
    I took out my camera.

    END OF SONG — if you press <Next>,
    the chorus will begin again.


    Next Sea Song

     

    Thus, in Malloy’s Penelope, the interplay of hypertextual freedom and sequential constraint — an artifact of the electronic medium itself — surprisingly produces a variant enactment of the dilemmas and decisions her woman artist struggles w ith inside the fiction.

     

    In all of the works I have been discussing, the conscious feminism of the writer animates her determination not simply to write but to intervene in the structure of discourse, to interrupt reiterations of what has been written, to redirect the streams of narrative and to clear space for the construction of new textual forms more congenial to women’s subjectivity. And all of these writers have understood that their project entails both the articulation of formerly repressed or dismissed stories and th e rearticulation of textual forms and codes. It is for this reason, perhaps, that feminist theory and textual practice can be of particular pertinence to theorists of hypertext who recognize a radical politics in the rhetoric and poetics of hypertextual writing. And this is why, I believe, hypertext should prove to be a fruitful site for innovative writing by women, despite a deep-dyed skepticism and resistance toward its claims and demands.

     

    In her hypertext novel Quibbling, excerpts of which provided material for Izme Pass, Carolyn Guyer embeds passages from a diary that reflect her sense of writing at a critical moment of change in relations between women and m en. Importantly, she conceives that where they are placed textually will affect how they can develop and how they will encounter one another. Here, for example, is one such passage; its title is, significantly, “topographic”:

     

    8 Sept 90
    I wonder what would happen to the story if I changed how
    I have it organized right now.	I've been keeping all the
    various elements of it gathered separately in his/her own
    boxes and areas just so I could move around in it and work
    more easily.  But it strikes me that each of the men is
    developing as himself and in relation to his lover, while
    the women are developing as themselves but also kind of like
    sisters.  Each man has his box as a major element, or cove,
    but each woman has her own box within the nun area.
    Like a dormitory, gymnæceum, or a convent.
    
    I've thought a number of times lately to bring each woman
    into her lover's box and make each cove then a marriage box,
    but have not done it.  The topography of the story speaks as
    it forms, as well as when the reader encounters it.  I believe
    what I was (am) doing is helping the women stay independent.
    Also, giving them access, through proximity, to each
    other.

     

    In many ways, topography is the story of this writing, and it is remarkable that women, so long objectified and imprisoned in male fantasies of the feminine as territory, earth, terra incognita, should incorporate into the struggle to achieve self-articulation the remaking of both the material and figurative space in which they live, or will live after the earthquake that shakes down the myriad symbols and structures that have constricted them. Even in the handful of hypertextual fict ions that have been written thus far, the potential for projects of radical change in representational art is evident. Especially for women writers who self-reflexively incorporate thinking about texts into fiction and for women who wish to seize rather than shy from the technological means of production, hypertext — which peculiarly welcomes and makes space for refraction and oppositional discourses — can be inviting, even though it rightly arouses a suspicion that its assimilative vastness may swallo w up subversion.

     

    This suspicion is confirmed provocatively by Stuart Moulthrop and Nancy Kaplan in a discussion of what they regard as the “futility of resistance” in electronic writing: “Where a resistant reading of print literature always produces another definitive discourse, the equivalent procedure in hypertext does just the opposite, generating not objective closure but a further range of openings that extend the discursive possibilities of the text for ‘constructive’ transaction.” (235) The very openness of hy pertext, initially appealing to writers of resistance discourses, carries the risk that their voices may simply be absorbed into the medium, precisely because, as Moulthrop and Kaplan explain, “it offers no resistance to the intrusion.” (235) The subversions and contestations in Izme Pass, however, suggest that resistance is possible at least at the level of syntax or structure. Similarly, as her diary in Quibbling indicates, Guyer wishes to structure gender-specific bo undaries and communities into her text, in an effort to preserve her fictive women’s independence from men while giving them proximity to other women. While the principle of linking perhaps does open a text to limitless discursive possibility, as Moulthr op and Kaplan argue, when a graphic mapping is used, as in Storyspace documents, new possibilities for demarcation and affiliation appear. This protocol, however, carries its own hazard; although any writing in an open electronic text is both provisional and discursively extendable, graphic maps or syntactic displays can reinscribe enclosure and hierarchy.

     

    In differently structuring the text spaces of men and women in Quibbling, Guyer moves toward the encoding of difference at the level of structure, but then, through the reflexive interpolation of the diary, she shifts the signification of those spaces into history, by analogy to women’s communities in the dormitory, convent or gymnæceum. Historians of women have viewed such places variously, either as sites of confinement or as sites where women have achieved both supportive commun ity and freedom from servitude. While giving scope to the independence of women, in Quibbling (and in the collaborative Izme Pass) Guyer places emphasis on the importance of women’s communities through both structure and story. In Penelope, Malloy lays emphasis on the development of women’s subjectivity: like the individualistic Woolf with her room of one’s own, Anne Mitchell seeks a place where she can concentrate her attention and do her work, like Maso wh o wants to write, not the “real” story, but what “the story was for me.” (my italics) There is ample room in feminism for both tendencies; one can easily imagine an Ava or an Anne Mitchell at work within the fictive space of Quibbling. The direction hypertext and its fictions will take in this volatile moment for textuality and for gender relations is not altogether clear, but if hypertext is to realize its potential as a medium for inclusive and democratic writing, it is profoundly important that women’s desire and creative will should contribute to its future shapings. As Guyer writes, “the topography of the story speaks as it forms,” and a more hospitable topography will speak a fuller, richer story, one that can, as Retallack a rgues, invite those former Others into an ongoing shared discourse.

     

    Notes

     

    1. On the matter of “writing the feminine,” two questions are likely to be raised right away: (1) does the very term impose an invidious construction of the dyad masculine/feminine, such that the “feminine” locks writers into otherness, lack, and erasure; (2) does “writing the feminine” limit or liberate the writer, or perhaps achieve some other unanticipated result? I intend to take up these questions less in reference to theory than to the practice and professions of women writers wh o regard themselves as feminist or who regard their texts as examples of writing the feminine.

     

    2. See for example Nancy K. Miller, “Arachnologies: The Woman, The Text, and the Critic.”

     

    3. Kristeva’s “Stabat Mater,” for example.

     

    4. In her essay, “Fretwork: ReForming Me,” Carolyn Guyer describes her dismay on finding that someone had taken up her invitation to add writing to a work of hers, because she first judged that it was not good and then felt guilty becau se she “was imposing cultural values as if they were universal, absolute standards.” In this essay she searches for theoretical and figurative means by which to incorporate and embody “the challenges of multicultural communities,” uncovering along the wa y the trap of perfectionism (as Maso has also done in her argument for the messiness of the novel) and, by contrast, the privilege, as she defines it, “in sharing rather than in the owning of knowledge.” This leads her to argue for the value of opening a rt to differences that alter contexts and restore the vitality of dynamic process rather than the stillness of mastery. Guyer’s argument calls to mind John Cage’s advocacy of aleatory composition.

     

    Works Cited

     

    • Bernstein, Charles. A Poetics. Cambridge, MA and London: Harvard UP, 1992.
    • Cha, Theresa Hak Kyung. Dictee. 1982, Berkeley: Third Woman P, 1995.
    • Friedman, Ellen G., and Miriam Fuchs, eds. Breaking the Sequence: Women’s Experimental Fiction. Princeton: Princeton UP, 1989.
    • Guyer, Carolyn. “Fretwork: ReForming Me.” Unpublished.
    • —. Quibbling. Eastgate Systems. Software, 1991. Macintosh and Windows.
    • Guyer, Carolyn and Martha Petry. Izme Pass. Writing on the Edge 2.2 (Spring 1991). Eastgate Systems, 1991. Software. Macintosh.
    • —. “Notes for Izme Pass Expose.” Writing on the Edge 2.2 (Spring 1991): 82-89.
    • Irigaray, Luce. This Sex Which Is Not One. Trans. Catherine Porter. Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1985.
    • Joyce, Michael. Afternoon. Eastgate Systems, 1987. Software. Macintosh.
    • —. WOE. Writing on the Edge 2.2 (Spring 1991). Eastgate, 1991. Software. Macintosh.
    • Jouve, Nicole Ward, with Sue Roe and Susan Sellers. “Where Now, Where Next?” The Semi-Transparent Envelope: Women Writing — Feminism and Fiction. Eds. Roe, Sellers, Jouve, with Michèle Roberts. London and NY: Marion Boyers, 1994.
    • Kristeva, Julia. “Stabat Mater.” The Kristeva Reader. Ed. Toril Moi. NY: Columbia UP, 1986.
    • Malloy, Judy. its name was Penelope. Eastgate Systems, 1993. Software. Macintosh and Windows.
    • Maso, Carole. AVA. Normal, IL: Dalkey Archive P, 1993.
    • —. “OnAVA.” Conjunctions 20 (May 1993): 172-76.
    • —. “Notes of a Lyric Artist Working in Prose: A Lifelong Conversation with Myself, Entered Midway.” American Poetry Review 24.2 (March/April 1995): 26-31.
    • Miller, Nancy K. “Arachnologies: The Woman, The Text, and the Critic.” The Poetics of Gender. Ed. Nancy K. Miller. NY: Columbia UP, 1986. 270-95.
    • Moulthrop, Stuart and Nancy Kaplan. “They Became What They Beheld: The Futility of Resistance in the Space of Electronic Writing.” Literacy and Computers: The Complications of Teaching and Learning with Technology. Eds. Cynthia L. Selfe and Susan Hilligoss. NY: Modern Language Association of America, 1994. 220-37.
    • Retallack, Joan. “:RE:THINKING:LITERARY:FEMINISM: (three essays onto shaky grounds).” Feminist Measures: Soundings in Poetry and Theory. Eds. Lynn Keller and Christanne Miller. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1994. 344-77.
    • Rich, Adrienne. The Dream of a Common Language: Poems 1974-1977. New York: Norton, 1978.
    • Robinson, Lou, and Camille Norton, eds. Resurgent: New Writing by Women. Urbana and Chicago: U of Illinois Press, 1992.
    • Wong, Shelley Sunn. “Unnaming the Same: Theresa Hak Kyung Cha’s DICTEE.” Feminist Measures: Soundings in Poetry and Theory. Eds. Lynn Keller and Christanne Miller. Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1994. 43-68.

     

    Some Other Hypertext Works by Women

     

    • Arnold, Mary-Kim. Lust. Eastgate Quarterly, 1:2 (1993).
    • Cramer, Kathryn. In Small & Large Pieces. Eastgate Quarterly, 1:3 (1994).
    • Douglas, Jane Yellowlees. I Have Said Nothing. Eastgate Quarterly, 1:2 (1993).
    • Jackson, Shelley. Patchwork Girl, by Mary Shelley and Herself. Eastgate Systems, 1995.
    • Larsen, Deena. Marble Springs. Eastgate Systems, 1993.
    • Mac, Kathy. Unnatural Habitats. Eastgate Quarterly, 1:3 (1994).
    • Moran, Monica. Ambulance: An Electronic Novel. Electronic Hollywood, 1993.
    • Smith, Sarah. King of Space. Eastgate Systems, 1990.

     

  • “The Nine Grounds of Intellectual Warfare”

    Paul Mann

    Department of English
    Pomona College
    pmann@pomona.claremont.edu

     

    Prediction (1994):

     

    We are about to witness a rise of “war studies” in the humanities. On your next plane trip the person beside you dozing over a copy of Sun Tzu’s Art of War might not be a corporate CEO but a professor of philosophy. There will soon be whole conferences on warfare; more courses in liberal arts curricula on the theory and literature of warfare; special issues of journals on war studies published not by historians or social scientists but by literary critics; new studies of the culture of the Kriegsspiel; new readings of Homer, Kleist, Crane. Books of gender criticism on the subject of war are already appearing, and essays on Clausewitz are now liable to turn up in literary journals and books of critical theory.1 And we will hear more and more of the sort of moral outrage critics exercised during the Gulf War over the way the video-game imagery of computer simulations displaced grievous bodily harm.

     

    Perhaps this imminent frenzy of production will open another front in the current campaign against the aesthetics of ideology. To the extent that modern warfare depends on the eclipse of the real by images, cultural critics would seem especially qualified to analyze it. Elaine Scarry: “it is when a country has become to its citizens a fiction that wars begin.”2 If this is the case, if war arises from an investment in certain fictions, then critics of fiction ought to be able to teach us to read war critically — and, along the way, to establish the moral and political gravity of their own work. What is at issue here, however, are not only analyses of war but also analogies of it. We will burrow into the archives of warfare because we will see, or at least want to see, criticism itself as a form of warfare. We will project an image of ourselves onto a field of study and recognize our reflection in it. Gender critics already study war discourse in order both to attack its violent phallicism and to conceive gender struggle itself along strategic lines. We have theory wars, PC wars, linguistics wars, Gerald Graff’s culture wars, Avital Ronell appropriating the war on drugs for a theory of reading.3 Vast energies will be expended not only on the archives and rhetoric of warfare but on the warcraft of rhetoric and critical inquiry, on the “violence” of the question, on the “mobile army of metaphors, metonyms, and anthropomorphisms” that, for Nietzsche, make up what is called truth.4

     

    We will pursue the subject of warfare because we will increasingly see a relationship between our own activity and warfare. Let me articulate the law that governs this movement: Critical discourse always tends toward the eventual phenomenalization, as objects of study, of the devices that structure it. War becomes a field of critical study when critics come to believe, however obliquely, that criticism has always been a field of warfare. And warfare not only in the narrow terms of intellectual difference, but in the most material terms as well. If, for Clausewitz, war is an extension of policy, for Paul Virilio the reverse is true: politics and culture are, from the outset, extensions of warfare, of a logistical economy that encompasses and ultimately exhausts all of society. Standard critiques of the coordination of scientific research with the “military-industrial complex” are already being extended to include the ideological state apparatus; for Virilio, technology as such is a logistical invention and in one way or another always answers logistical demands, and the same point will be made about technologies of representation.5 The humanities are in a mood to see the complicity of what Enzensberger called the “consciousness industry” in the military-industrial-knowledge complex, to see themselves at one and the same time as ideological agents of the state’s “war machine” and as warriors against the state.6 I will have more to say about this contradiction.

     

    To repeat: The object of criticism is always a symptom, if you will, of the structure of critical discourse itself, always a phenomenalization of the device. But this device tends to appear in a surrogate form, still dissimulated and displaced; it appears and does not appear, makes itself known in ways that further conceal its stakes. And it always appears too late, at the very moment it ceases to function: a kind of theory-death, a death that is not a termination but a particular sort of elaboration. Now, everywhere we look, critics will be casting off their clerical mantles and rhetorical labcoats for suits of discursive armor; the slightest critical aggression or ressentiment will be inflated with theoretical war-machines and territorial metaphorics.7 At the same time, the very rise of war discourse among us will signal the end of intellectual warfare for us, its general recuperation by the economics of intellectual production and exchange. It might therefore be delusional — even, as some would argue, obscene, given the horrible damage of real war — to think of this academic bickering as warfare, and yet it remains a trace of war, and perhaps the sign of a potential combat some critical force could still fight.

     

    It would be a mistake to assume that this metamorphosis of discourse as war into discourse on war has occurred because criticism has become more political. On the contrary, criticism has never been more than a political effect — “policy” carried out, and in our case dissipated, by other means. The long process of seizing politics as the proper object of criticism is one more tardy phenomenalization of the device. What we witness — and what difference would it make even if I were right? — is not proof of the politicization of criticism but an after-image of its quite peripheral integration with forms of geopolitical conflict that are, in fact, already being dismantled and remodeled in war rooms, defense institutes, and multinational corporate headquarters. War talk, like politics talk, like ethics talk, like all critical talk, is nostalgic from the start. While we babble about territories and borders, really still caught up in nothing more than a habitual attachment to disciplinary “space” and anxious dreams of “agency,” the technocrats of warfare are developing strategies that no longer depend on any such topography, strategies far more sophisticated than anything we have imagined. And we congratulate ourselves for condemning them, and for our facile analogies between video games and smart bombs.

     

    I would propose two distinct diagnoses of the rise of war talk. On one hand, war talk is merely another exercise in rhetorical inflation, intended to shore up the fading value of a dubious product, another symptom of the imaginary politics one witnesses everywhere in critical discourse, another appearance of a structural device at the very moment it ceases to operate. On the other hand, war talk might still indicate the possibility of actually becoming a war machine, of pursuing a military equivalent of thought beyond all these petty contentions, of realizing the truth of discourse as warfare and finally beginning to fight. It will be crucial here not to choose between these diagnoses. In the domain of criticism they function simultaneously, in a perpetual mutual interference; there is no hope of extricating one from the other, no hope of either becoming critical warriors or being relieved of the demand that we do so.

     

    The real task of this prediction is thus not to make any claim on the future, but rather to pursue a sort of genealogy, in Nietzsche’s or Foucault’s sense, in reverse: a projective genealogy, so to speak: an account not so much of the future as of the present, of the order of knowledge at this very moment. War here is a way to theorize discourse as collective behavior, to reconceive shifting positions, alliances, defenses, attacks, casualties and losses, logistical strengths and weaknesses, the friction and fog of discursive conflict. I will sketch out nine grounds of intellectual warfare: Logistics, Logomachia, Fortification, the Desert, the Screen, Number, High Ground, Chaos, and the Cemetery.8 These grounds are not exhaustive and do not constitute a singular field; they are not arranged in a logical sequence and do not amount to a single argument moving toward a single conclusion. War looks different from the vantage of each ground. During a given campaign an army or a writing might find itself, at different times, in different tactical situations and encounters, occupying several or all of these grounds, and deploying its forces in different arrangements. In this essay, the nine grounds do not amount to any telos, any whole, nor even an intellectual position, but in my movement among them I hope to indicate, in the most preliminary and doubtless futile manner, strategies for a critical writing that might actually learn from the war machines it studies.

     

    I. Logistics:

     

    It is commonplace to reduce intellectual production to economic terms. There is a vast, indeed a surplus critique of the commodification of thought, but critics are only just beginning to believe, as perhaps our travelling CEO has long believed, that there is some advantage in seeing their own business as warfare, and that it is possible to do so because culture, business, and defense are always to some degree integrated.9 Any executive who entertains the notion that he or she is a corporate warrior is no doubt engaged in a fantasy, but one should not be too quick to dismiss the utility of such fantasies, their ability to inspire performance. And perhaps we too should make a more rigorous accounting of our own investments in various critical ideologies, which so often presume to combat the institution while sustaining its discursive economy by the very means of our attacks. Everyone is aware that thought has been reified and transformed into a commodity, but that awareness has never inhibited production. The critique of the commodity produces perfectly marketable commodities. The half-conscious fantasies of the truth-warrior energize the intellectual economy quite as much as the samurai fantasies of the corporate factotum fuel the marketplace.

     

     

    Virilio would argue that they are not fantasies at all; stripped of narcissistic ornament, we would still have to see ourselves as soldiers. Writing in the high years of the Cold War, Virilio developed a theory of “pure war,” global war so efficient it never needs to be fought, rather like William Burroughs’s notion that a functioning police state needs no police. What is most crucial for Virilio’s conception of the warfare state is his extreme emphasis on logistics. “Logistics is the beginning of the economy of war, which will become simple economy, to the point of replacing political economy” (PW 4). The invention of the city as such lies in logistical preparation for war. War is not an aberration, the negation of the truth of civilization, so much as its origin; or rather, civilization depends on an origin and order that forever threaten its destruction. And in a sense we have returned to this logistical origin:

     

    If we can say that war was entirely strategic in past societies, we can now say that strategy is no more than logistics. In turn, logistics has become the whole of war; because in an age of deterrence, the production of arms is already war. . . . Deterrence is the development of an arms capacity that assures total peace. The fact of having increasingly sophisticated weaponry deters the enemy more and more. At that point, war is no longer in its execution, but in its preparation. The perpetuation of war is what I call Pure War, war which is acted out . . . in infinite preparation. [However,] this infinite preparation, the advent of logistics, also entails the non-development of society . . . , peace as war, as infinite preparation which exhausts and will eventually eliminate societies. The Total Peace of Deterrence is Total War pursued by other means. (PW 91-93, 139, 25)

     

    One could argue that the stakes have changed: the Cold War is over and smaller wars are heating up; one could also argue that this is merely another case of total deterrence, and not yet achieved. In any event, to whatever degree a discrete militarization of the peacetime economy has occurred, in Virilio’s model this logistical “endocolonization” depends on the production of technical knowledge. Indeed technology has its very origin in logistical demands: technology arises from the need for weaponry, “from the arsenal and war economy” (24). But it is not a matter of armaments alone: “the war-machine is not only explosives, it’s also communications, vectorization. It’s essentially the speed of delivery. . . . It’s war operating in the sciences. It’s everything that is already perverting the field of knowledge from one end to the other; everything that is aligning the different branches of knowledge in a perspective of the end” (20). There is, here, no viable distinction between defense research and peacetime applications of science. Technology as such is a function of total logistics. Every form of knowledge supports the warfare state. Analogous if less exaggerated claims have been made by Alvin and Heidi Toffler in War and Anti-War, a lay account of the reliance of post-Cold War strategy on increasingly sophisticated weapons systems. It would seem that the end of the Cold War and the collapse of Virilio’s global deterrence, which has resulted in drastic cutbacks in defense budgets and damage to the American economy as a whole, only exacerbates the logistical demand. Weapons now have to be smarter because we cannot afford so many of them; fighting forces now have to be more skilled, more mobile, and more cybernetically coordinated to deal with the realities of post-Cold War conflict. Tactical advantages are measured in technological terms rather than by sheer force of troop numbers. War, the Tofflers argue, is now about technical knowledge, increasingly fought by means of knowledge, and perhaps, in the future, over knowledge, over technological capabilities. “Cyberwar” is no longer science fiction: the acquisition, systematization, and deployment of technical knowledge have become the ground and stakes of bloody wars.10

     

    As the economy in general and technological development in particular come to be seen in logistical terms, so the critical industry too will be taken as a logistical system, and war discourse as pure war carried out by other means. But it is all too easy to conflate military, technological, and intellectual production. It might be that the forces of deterrence or nuclear war really do extend into criticism, into the study of texts, into the colloquium and critical journal, but even if there is some economic coordination between them, it would be a mistake to elide their differences. There is no question that military success is increasingly determined by access to technical knowledge and that logistical development is a laboratory for new technologies, but to recognize this is not to prove that all fields of knowledge are connected to military research in the same ways. Such claims will certainly be made, with fantastic effects, just as the critical truisms that fictions are informed by political realities and that politics is dependent upon fictive forms are turned around, without careful examination of the reversability of these propositions, into the quite dubious but productive thesis that therefore criticism of these fictions constitutes political action. What pure war indicates, however, is that intellectual warfare is not oppositional: it is a form of systems-maintenance, and a feature of the status quo of capital.

     

    Hence war discourse will cast intellectuals as agents of a general logistical economy and at the same time offer them an array of quite useful and quite delusional critical fantasies about their combat for and against the warfare state. But let me suggest another economics here, another fantasy, one not restricted to the familiar terms of use- and exchange-value for the military-industrial-knowledge complex, but based as it were on waste-value: a general economy, in Bataille’s sense: an economy like that of the sun, which gives life but is utterly indifferent to it, burns itself out as fast as it can, expends most of its energy into the void. Bataille’s image of war-economics is the ritual practice of the potlatch, a form of symbolic combat most likely associated with funerary observances, but which he sees as a solar means of purging the superabundance of natural and cultural energy. The purpose of art and thought is the purest expenditure, waste, dépense.11 Intellectual warfare can be seen in this light, as ritualized combat whose value is that it has no value: a means of squandering useless wealth. Intellectual production is the production of superfluities tricked out with beautiful illusory truths, and we meet to exchange ideas only in order to destroy thought itself with these ludicrous gifts.

     

    II. Logomachia:

     

    The quasi-conflictual structure of the colloquium; the nationalization of intellectual outlooks (e.g., French vs. Anglo-American feminism, English studies vs. German philology in the wake of the First World War); the “diversification” of disciplines carried out as the conquest and colonization of discrete areas of academic territory, and all the ensuing turf wars between departments, methodologies, etc.; rising concern about the invasive, “violent” force of interrogation and argument in even so innocuous an act as literary interpretation; all the petty jockeying for personal advantage that will pass for intellectual combat: these are horizonal phenomena, indications of more prevalent and insistent orders of conflict that structure intellectual work and, perhaps, work in general.

     

    Beyond these familiar instances, imagine for a moment (it is a fable, not philosophy) that Hegel, or at least Kojève’s Hegel, was right: consciousness, history, civilization begin with combat: “man, to be really, truly ‘man,’ and to know that he is such, must . . . impose the idea he has of himself on beings other than himself,” in a fight to the death in which no one dies, and in which the stakes are only recognition, the establishment of a certain narcissistic regime, the invention of nothing more than the subject.12

     

    Perhaps then the first violence is the formal and ideal reduction of the complexity of conflict to a dialectical system.

     

    Let me modulate the fable a bit further:

     

    When imposition is collective, the fight becomes battle.

     

    When it is strategically directed, it becomes warfare.

     

    When we fight to impose not our own idea but an idea that has been imposed upon us, and with which we identify so intensely it is as if the idea were our own, we become soldiers.

     

    The soldier is essential to the dialectic: neither master nor quite simply slave but the device that mediates between them. The soldier is slave as hero, risking death in order to impose the master’s will on another slave. Perhaps intellectual soldiers too are not slaves who can comprehend their slavery and still revolt but hoplite phalanxes marshalled in order for the day of intellectual battle; Plato’s guardians in the chariot of reason, and a chariot is, after all, a military transport.

     

    It is not even precisely that some specific other has imposed his idea on us: the master is always in part a figure out of our own imagination, out of our desire and fear, a stand-in for a “true” master we can never quite locate and who need not even really exist, and we confront “death” in his name, in various surrogate forms, so that we will never have to confront our death. Any veteran of combat could testify to the folly of this project, even though the veteran might only have shifted his or her own allegiance to another ideal.

     

    The slave’s fear of death is thus overcome as a warrior fantasy, itself in the service of a master the slave has to some degree invented. For the intellectual warrior as well, fear of death — of not being recognized, and thus of not being — is not overcome but displaced, sublimated, pursued through a vast array of surrogates, including the sublime study of death. Intellectual warfare is not a culmination of the master-slave dialectic but its proxy, its aesthetic. The sentimental violence of dialectics.

     

    Today almost everyone seems to believe that, at the end of this struggle, what we confront is not the triumph of absolute reason but the collapse of the entire project, the idea, the hope and dream of the absolute. I would argue that this theoretical collapse is the event-horizon, the phenomenal threshold, of intellectual warfare. The theoretical abandonment of the absolute is rarely accompanied by its disappearance: the absolute returns in a ghostly form, haunting precisely those discourses that claim to have left it behind, and that continue to orient themselves around its evacuation. Nevertheless, this half-waking from the half-dream of absolute reason returns us to a primal dialectical scene, to a war for recognition now without stakes. In the farcical relativism that results, dominance is ever more explicitly a matter not of truth but of force. And if we discover that we have never gone further, that force is all that ever mattered, can we say that the dialectic ever occurred at all?

     

    This self-consuming conflict is visible from another perspective. If war, as an extension of logistical, tactical, and strategic knowledge, is an extension of thought, it also ruins thought. It exceeds every effort of dialectical containment. The same forces that drive military conflicts past the limits of rational control, in Clausewitz’s view, drive the idea of war past the limits of conception. As Daniel Pick observes,

     

    For Clausewitz, war is always to be understood as subordinate to political will. That is an iron law. But it also slips out of control, threatening to become jubilantly and anarchically autonomous. It is willed, but all too prone to chance and accident. . . . The practice of war, Clausewitz contends, can be shown to undermine the consistency of thought and theory upon war. . . . [War is] an idea, an abstraction, a supposed structural necessity; but also . . . an impossible subject, the subversive force in the account that seeks to master it.13

     

    The “friction” of war can never be reduced to a system. That is why Clausewitz distrusts theory, even as he engages in what would seem to be a theoretical exercise. According to Garry Wills, that is also why Clausewitz insists on the distinction between theory and Kritik, the broadest empirical assessment possible in any strategic or tactical situation, without reference to absolute laws of warfare that the realities of battle may well disprove, with disastrous results for those who adhere to them. It is not that Clausewitz refuses any generality — his dictum about war as politics is certainly theoretical, and rules of warfare are proposed everywhere in his text — rather that tactical and strategic considerations should never be determined by rules alone; rules need to be tested, and what is most important is close critical observation of the field of battle from the highest empirical ground available. But if Wills believes that the distinction between theory and Kritik resolves the problem of analyzing the friction of war, Pick is just as adamant that theory and Kritik themselves are at war in Clausewitz’s own analysis, in any consideration of warfare, and the notorious inconsistencies of On War reflect the truth of this conflict. Kritik is compromised by its own forms of friction. As Peter Paret observes, in published studies of war even the most factual descriptions of battle ought to be printed in a different colored ink to indicate the discrepancy between a battle and every account of it.14War is absolute force pushed past the limit of dialectical recuperation; it involves the theoretical experience of the destruction of theory, which cannot be alleviated by any resort to empiricism.

     

    Jacqueline Rose makes a similar point in respect to Freud. As a fundamental instance of human aggression, war could be said to constitute a proper field for psychoanalytic investigation, an object of scientific knowledge. The problem is that

     

    [if] Freud offers . . . an explanation of war, he does so by means of the death drive. But the death drive, and hence the truth of war, operates, it has so often been pointed out, as the speculative vanishing point of psychoanalytic theory, and even more boldly, of the whole of scientific thought.15

     

    Hence war is not only an object of knowledge but its “crisis,” its proper logomachia, “the instability, the necessary failure, of knowledge as resolution that [Freud] places at the foundation, or limit, of all scientific thought.”16

     

    War . . . operates in Freud’s discourse, and not only in that of Freud, as a limit to the possibility of absolute or total knowledge, at the same time as such absolute or total knowledge seems over and again to be offered as one cause — if not the cause — of war. . . . The end of war [is] the end of knowledge. (16-17)

     

    What is most challenging about this formulation is that the destruction of knowledge, its vanishing point, is both its foundation and its limit, the condition of its existence even as it destroys it. The impossibility of knowledge becomes the very order of knowledge. This device too must eventually rise into discourse and manifest itself as a proxy object of inquiry.

     

    III. Fortification:

     

    Nothing is more important to the intellectual than a position. Even the fabled collapse of foundations has done little to change this: economically, discursively, this collapse turns out to be yet another position, something to believe in and hold true, the consolidation of “flows,” “drift,” etc., into the most familiar academic architecture. You must have a position, and if you do not, one will be assigned to you, or you will simply not exist. The homology of position as standpoint and position as job, budget line, FTE, is a matter of a great deal more than analogy or vulgar marxism. With a position, everything is possible. You are supported by a truth, a discipline, a methodology, a rhetorical style, a discursive form, a mode of production and exchange. You know where you stand, you recognize yourself by your position; you see yourself there because you see yourself seen there. Your position is your identity and value; it authorizes your work, circulates it, constitutes it as property, lends you the security of ownership. But at the same time nothing is possible with a position. To hold a position is to be held by it, to be caught up in its inertial and economic determinations, to be captured by an identity that you might not, finally, believe to be quite your own. Nothing could be more difficult than really, substantively, radically to change one’s mind, change the forms in which one works, risk everything by leaving behind a position on which, it seems, everything has come to rely.

     

    The position is a fundamental form of civilization. Recall Virilio’s remark that the city itself originates in a position, a garrison, a defensive posture, a logistical form.17 To adopt the terminology of A Thousand Plateaus, the position is a “sedentary fortification” of “state armies”; it is entirely contained by the state apparatus.18 In academic criticism, the symbolic place of the state is occupied and held by the text or oeuvre, around which the defending force of commentaries is deployed; in a field such as English or Comparative Literature, the state or national form of the text is clearly and hence problematically manifested. The critic defends the text by the elaborate construction of interpretations around it; at the same time, in a kind of fractal homomorphism, the critic’s own position is defined and defended by the construction of the paper circle of his or her own works. The more forces occupy a position, the stronger it will be. The barrage of words projected from the most heavily fortified strongholds (currently: New Historicism, postcolonial criticism, certain orders of gender and race theory) can repel critiques by sheer force of numbers. Indeed, conflict between positions is itself one of the chief means by which they are defined. As Rose points out, for Freud war “not only threaten[s] civilization, it can also advance it. By tending towards the conglomeration of nations, it operates [not only] like death [but also] like the eros which strives to unify” (16). In intellectual warfare, the strategic form of this erotic unification is the discipline, in every sense of the word.19 Mechanisms of regimental identification are crucial here. It would be impossible to overestimate the importance of esprit de corps to garrisoned forces. Healthy competition keeps troops battle-sharp and singles out the most effective officers, but such conflict must be contained and focused toward strategic goals.

     

    If, on one hand, it is a mistake to refer to intellectual movements, since their force is always institutional, static, on the other hand it is the fixity of the intellectual position that proves to be illusory. A position must not only be held, but advanced. The surrounding territory must come under its influence and control. Furthermore, as Clausewitz indicates, defenses tend to become offensive. It is not simply that the best defense is a good offense; defenses, like attacks, exceed the limits of strategic reason. The escalating, offensive character of nuclear deterrence has long been noted. So also for the provocative force of the most striking cultural formations: defensive postures escalate beyond the power of whatever threat they face. More importantly, the position is never more than a temporary establishment: once consolidated, its termination is assured; the more force it generates, the more certain that its walls will be breached. That is Virilio’s brief against deterrence: it exhausts its own resources, it destroys the societies it defends. There is no indefensible position, and no position that can be defended for very long. At the moment a position is founded, its destruction has begun. Defections to other positions, other cities of words, are doubtless already under way.

     

    The intellectual position is therefore not simply a ground, let alone a foundation, however attached to or identified with it its garrison becomes, even in the act of arguing that there is no foundation. On the contrary, the position turns out to be a point along a vector, a line of advance or retreat, a temporary encampment, a bivouac, of strategic or tactical importance alone, and supportable only by means of its relation to other positions, other forces, counterforces, and logistical agencies all along the line. There is no question that the strength of the sited force’s investment in its ground, however temporary, is crucial. But in the end every position will turn out to have been a relay-point or intersection, the temporary location of an intellectual army whose grounding is not to be measured by its “rightness” — the archaic notion of truth proven by combat may be said to survive only in the academy — but by its force and resistance in relation to other quantities of force, velocity, intensity, logistical power, tactical skill, etc., all of which will not only support but eventually help to detach that army from its ground. In psychoanalytic terms, it would be necessary to see the texts that a writer deploys around his or her position as defense mechanisms of another order, that is to say, as symptoms, but not only of an individual pathology: rather as encysted trouble-spots on the intersecting curves of discursive forces about which the intellectual is often barely, if at all, aware, and which no one — no chaos theorist of discursive physics — will ever be able to map.

     

    The position is surrounded by a “border,” a “margin.” This circular, flat-earth topography mirrors larger discursive models, which still map everything in terms of centers, lines of defense, and antagonistic margins. It is little wonder that questions of colonialism have become so pressing: here too we encounter a phenomenalization of the discursive device. Modern critical production consistently sees itself as a matter of hegemonic centers (e.g., defenses of tradition) and marginal oppositions. But insofar as one wishes to retain this topography of margins and centers — and in the end there might not be much to recommend it — it might be better to see the marginal force as a function and effect of the center, the very means by which it establishes its line of defense. Military commanders might be unlikely to deploy their most troublesome troops along their perimeter, but in intellectual warfare the perimeter is marked out and held primarily by troops who imagine themselves in revolt against headquarters. This is the historical paradox of the avant-gardes: they believe they are attacking the army for which they are in fact the advance guard. The contradiction does not dissolve their importance, it marks their precise task: the dialectical defense and advance of discursive boundaries. It might therefore indicate the fundamental instability of cultural positions, but it does nothing to support the strictly oppositional claims of marginal forces. That is why postcolonial criticism remains a colonial outpost of an older critical form.

     

    Without exception, all positions are oriented toward the institutional apparatus. Marginality here is only relative and temporary: the moment black studies or women’s studies or queer theory conceives of itself as a discipline, its primary orientation is toward the institution. The fact that the institution might treat it badly hardly constitutes an ethical privilege. Any intellectual who holds a position is a function of this apparatus; his or her marginality is, for the most part, only an operational device. It is a critical commonplace that the state is not a monolithic hegemony but rather a constellation of disorganized and fragmentary agencies of production. This is often taken as a validation for the political potential of marginal critical movements: inside-outside relations can be facilely deconstructed and critics can still congratulate themselves on their “resistance.” But the contrary is clearly the case. The most profitable intellectual production does not take place at the center (e.g., Romance Philology), where mostly obsolete weapons are produced; the real growth industries are located precisely on the self-proclaimed margins. It will be argued that resistance is still possible; nothing I propose here argues against such a possibility. I wish only to insist that effective resistance will never be located in the position, however oppositional it imagines itself to be. Resistance is first of all a function of the apparatus itself. What would seem to be the transgressive potential of such institutional agencies as certain orders of gender criticism might demonstrate the entropy of the institution, but it does nothing to prove the counterpolitical claims of the position. Fantasies of resistance often serve as alibis for collusion. Any position is a state agency, and its relative marginality is a mode of orientation, not an exception. Effective resistance must be located in other tactical forms.

     

    IV. Desert:

     

    The standpoint, identification with and defense of one’s own thought, the demand that one be on one’s own side, that one stand by one’s word, is so standard a feature of intellectual ethics and politics that it has been taken completely for granted. But the entrenched position is a vestige of archaic forms of warfare. The Tofflers argue that the Gulf War demonstrated the failure of entrenchment — Iraq’s older, industrial, sedentary strategy — against advanced military technologies of speed, stealth, and coordinated intelligence. “[T]he allied force was not a [conventional military] machine, but a system with far greater internal feedback, communication, and self-regulatory adjustment capability. It was . . . a ‘thinking system’” (80). For Napoleon as well, Virilio notes, “the capacity for war [was] the capacity for movement” (WC 10). In the same manner, those bound to intellectual positions remain blind to the tactical advantages of mobility and secrecy, and the new war studies will be used to suggest strategic figures outside the position’s fortified walls.

     

    I will return to the precisely oxymoronic, self-canceling figure of secrecy in a later section. Here, I will proceed by suggesting that the new war studies should come to quite rigorous and unromantic terms with the nomadology of Deleuze and Guattari.20 In their work, the war machine is essentially exterior to the state, even if the state appropriates it. The problem is, therefore, how to pursue exteriority in disciplinary and epistemological structures that are themselves entirely defined by their institutional interiority. It will certainly not be through any of the current specular and spectacular modes of narcissistic identification with the “other.” One should treat every text that peddles its vicarious nomadism while elaborating the most conventional analyses with the greatest suspicion, and at the same time with some confidence, perhaps quite groundless, that an intellectual nomadology might still be carried out elsewhere.21 It is necessary to comprehend the force of extremely difficult ideas: the nomadic war-machine’s exteriority to the state and its precise relation to battle; the nomads’ territorial engagement with smooth space, without “striation,” interiority, or chrono-historical organization; their indifference to semiological systems and their particular epistemological orientations (ornament instead of sign, ballistics and metallurgical science, numbering, speed, etc.); the strange relation of A Thousand Plateaus to texts that would seem to treat the same matters in a more disciplinary way — its relation, for instance, to psychoanalysis and philosophy (and what is the strategic connection between this book and Deleuze’s extraordinary and in many ways quite scholarly treatments of the history of philosophy?); indeed, the very ontology of the nomadic idea itself: all of these must be explored in considerable detail, without ever descending to any merely exegetical commentary, and without reducing what is at stake in this book to an intellectual position. Deleuze and Guattari challenge us to rethink our whole relation to books and to writing, to the very order of our thought — a task in which they themselves often fail. One must begin by reading them at a loss, but a loss that is not only the result of their work’s difficulty, which careful analysis would eventually overcome; rather, a loss that reaches down into our deepest epistemological attachments. It will be necessary, for instance, to reconceive the very notion of intellectual rigor (the order of argument, demonstration, proof) and communicative clarity: not to abandon them for the sake of some impressionistic indulgence, but to relocate them outside the striated space of the state apparatus that has always provided their structure. One might find oneself, for instance, no longer putting forth positions, outlining, defending, and identifying oneself with them: one might find oneself engaged in an even more severe, more rigorous discipline of affirming ideas without attaching oneself to them, making them appear (as Baudrillard suggested in another context) only so as to make them disappear.22 One might find oneself developing a logic that is no longer striated and arborescent (a trunk and its branches) but smooth, rhizomatic, turbulent, fractal, self-interfering, labyrinthine, subterranean. I am fully aware of how treacherous, how complex and self-contradictory a gesture it is even to refer to these ideas in such a form and such a forum as this one, how properly absurd it would be to pursue writing, to pursue knowledge itself, in the following manner:

     

    The hydraulic model of nomad science and the war machine . . . consists in being distributed by turbulence across a smooth space, in producing a movement that holds space and simultaneously affects all of its points, instead of being held by space in a local movement from one specified point to another. . . . The nomadic trajectory . . . distributes people (or animals) in an open space, one that is indefinite and noncommunicating. . . . [S]edentary space is striated, by walls, enclosures, and roads between enclosures, while nomad space is smooth, marked only by “traits” that are effaced and displaced with the trajectory. Even the lamellae of the desert slide over each other, producing an inimitable sound. The nomad distributes himself in a smooth space; he occupies, inhabits, holds that space; that is his territorial principle. It is therefore false to define the nomad by movement. . . . [T]he nomad is on the contrary he who does not move. Whereas the migrant leaves behind a milieu that has become amorphous or hostile, the nomad is one who does not depart, does not want to depart, who clings to the smooth space left by the receding forest, where the steppe or the desert advance, and who invents nomadism as a response to this challenge. (TP 363, 380-81)

     

    How shall we read this passage, which so clearly bears on the organization of thought itself, even in respect to the question of the historical, empirical factuality of its account? How shall we read work that conceives nomadism in a way that has nothing to do with the standard distinction between stasis and movement, that never defines nomadism simply as movement opposed to sedentary positions? Can we ourselves move and distribute our thought across a deterritorialized discursive field, now conceived as smooth space, living off it without attachment to or support of any state form? And how can one write nomadically, since Deleuze and Guattari consign writing to the state apparatus?23What then is writing to them? One’s very attempt to appropriate nomadology in a critical essay serves as another instance of the state’s never quite successful appropriation of the war machine, and of the never fully addressed logistical-economic order of one’s own thought.

     

    Let me advance here — as a preliminary gesture toward work being carried out elsewhere and precisely in other forms, and perhaps only in order to help put an end to the delusional use of such terms as nomadology, deterritorialization, and the rhizome in almost every academic forum that tries to employ them — a tactical figure that has nothing to do with sedentary and fortified positions: the assemblage. I am concerned here with the “numerical” organization of intellectual work.24 Such work is of course highly institutional, hierarchical, regimental: intellectuals labor as individuals but their individualism is for the most part the atomic form of social and discursive systems entirely reliant on this atomization. The assemblage represents a mode of intellectual organization quite distinct from the pyramid scheme of individual in the service of discipline (whatever its ideological orientation) in the service of institution, etc., under which the professional intellectual currently labors. The notion of the assemblage can be traced, along one of its lines, to the nomad on horseback. The constellation “man-horse-stirrup” is a primary instance of an assemblage: a technological extension that transforms the subject it would seem to have served, installing the subject in another sort of instrumental relation and, in effect, in another ontology. “[T]here are no more subjects but dynamic individuations without subjects, which constitute collective assemblages.”25 Even so subjectivist a notion as desire is transformed here: assemblages are “passional, they are compositions of desire,” but desire “has nothing to do with a natural or spontaneous determination; there is no desire but assembling, assembled, engineered desire” (TP 398). What is at issue is the projective movement of desire, its ballistic force out of anything like a subject-position into something more like a “relay” on an extensive line of flight across smooth, nomadic space. “The problem of the war machine is that of relaying, even with modest means, not that of the architectonic model of the monument. An ambulent people of relayers, rather than a model society” (377). We are confronted with a different order of logistics itself: in a sense, the importance of lines of communication overtakes the importance of the strategic positions they were once thought only to support. There is clearly room here for a certain kind of analysis of cybernetic developments in critical exchange, although here too one must avoid indulging in any romance of technological transformation. If the assemblage of writer-software-network offers nomadic possibilities, no one would deny that the state has already recuperated this technology (the Internet is the home shopping network of the knowledge industries). That is why it is crucial to focus not only on the technological assemblage, but on its mode of circulation: the network’s accessibility for packs and bands that in their assembling do not serve institutional interests, whatever their day-jobs and unavoidable investments. Clearly the role of the hacker is suggestive here, not because of the quite trivial outlaw romance of hacking, nor because of any particular damage hackers might manage to inflict on this or that data base, but because of the form and force of the relay itself. Imagine banding together with others in temporary, mission-oriented, extra-institutional units, with specific, limited, tactical and strategic goals. Not the death or transcendence of the subject (not any metaphysics at all); not a post-bourgeois utopia of drifts; surely not the establishment of any new isms; rather the transitory platooning of specific on-line skills and thought-weapons in mobile strike forces in the net. Perhaps the resurgent interest in the Situationist International will be less valuable for its polemics against the “spectacle,” which only serve an already over-represented critique of representation, than for the organizational models offered by its particular forms of intellectual labor: the Situationist council as a nomadic war machine. The practice of such organization would affect the forms of thought itself. Assemblages will serve as the auto-erosive becoming-machine of what was never exactly the intellectual “subject.” The transformation might already be occurring, on-line, even as the network surrenders to the apparatus of the newly transformed state.

     

    The task is to develop a war machine “that does not have war as its object.” It is a persistent theme for Deleuze and Guattari: the war machine only takes military conflict as its primary object when it is appropriated by the state; nomadology indicates other directions and ends. Reducing the war machine to warfare: in the realm of intellectual warfare, that would involve reducing it to conflicting binaries, to dialectics. If warfare as such indicates the most reduced dialectical forms of positionality and negation (no use imagining oneself “beyond dialectics,” since the beyond still drags the dialectic along with it), even the state army’s distribution of its forces might already suggest a more nomadic form of organization: deployed like a herd across a whole field, communicating rhizomatically, etc.26 Witness then this strange twist on Clausewitz:

     

    the distinction between absolute war as Idea and real wars seems of great importance. . . . The pure Idea is not that of the abstract elimination of the adversary, but that of a war machine which does not have war as its object, and which only entertains a potential or supplementary relation with war. Thus the nomad war machine does not appear to us to be one case of real war among others, as in Clausewitz, but on the contrary the content adequate to the Idea, the invention of the Idea, with its own objects, space, and composition of the nomos. . . . The other pole seem[s] to be the essence; it is when the war machine, with infinitely lower “quantities,” has as its object not war, but the tracing of a creative line of flight, the composition of a smooth space and of the movement of people in that space. At this other pole, the machine does indeed encounter war, but as its supplementary or synthetic object, now directed against the State and against the worldwide axiomatic expressed by States. (420, 422)

     

    It is crucial to note that Deleuze and Guattari are not critics, of Clausewitz or anything else. For all its talk of “against the state,” very little about their work has to do with critical dialectics. They are committed rather to a certain affirmation, generated perhaps most of all out of their nomadic encounters with Nietzsche’s thought. In that sense, a proper approach to their work will never take the form of elaborating critical objections to it, even when they would seem to be warranted. Nonetheless, I would argue that the greatest obstacle to deploying nomadology in a smooth space outside the state lies in the fact that nomadology, or something like it, might also represent the current form of the state’s own development. Sedentary armies are being defeated and replaced by nomadic strategies still directed toward warfare, in the service of deterritorializing states.27If the end of global deterrence has hardly resulted in anything resembling a more pacific internationalism, but rather in a more ferocious and, it is often claimed, atavistic nationalism — represented in western eyes, as usual, by Africa (e.g., Rwanda) and the Balkans — at the same time we are also witnessing a reorganization of the state apparatus through the movement of multinational capital, information technologies, and high-tech international military interventions, as in Somalia and the Gulf. It is tempting, for some, to see these changes as signs of a shift from an old world order to a newer, braver one, but one ought to see them instead as the most complex of knots. The Bosnian conflict represents at one and the same time an especially vicious nationalism and the resurgence of nomadic war machines; the allied forces of the Gulf War represent interests at one and the same time external to the state and entirely in its employ; multinational capital represents at one and the same time a nomadic form of deterritorialization and the state’s attempt to survive what it believes to be its imminent demise. In the light of these events intellectual warfare confronts the complexities of its own appropriations and lines of flight. It also confronts massive proof of its utter triviality.

     

    V. Screen:

     

    Much of what we will be given to read in the new war studies will be rehearsals of older critiques of representation, heated by a certain love-hate toward cyber-technology; critiques of aestheticized violence as violence against real suffering, with the critic posing heroically beside the figure of the real. This moral reconnaissance of video games and smart bombs will be accompanied by historicist accounts of the spectacular aspects of warfare, perhaps along the lines of Virilio’s War and Cinema, in which, it is argued, “war is cinema and cinema is war,” a “deadly harmony . . . always establishes itself between the functions of eye and weapon” (26, 69). This facile but suggestive conflation of military and cinematic epistemologies into a single logistical project will also lend itself to the familiar critique of the phallic violence of the cinematic “gaze.” The limit of these reflections is liable to be the logic of the “simulacrum,” greatly reduced from its development in either Baudrillard or Deleuze. Let me suggest that the problem before us is not, however, only the spectacularly telegenic appearance of the Gulf War but the fact that these critical reflections on spectacular screens are produced on the spectacular screens of critics’ computers. It will be necessary to investigate the cybernetic and epistemological apparatus of critical debates in the light of developments in military technology and the conduct of actual warfare, but it will be some time before the extraordinarily complex ways in which their integration occurs can be adequately described, and one should avoid collapsing differences between these networks. They are not to be mapped onto each other in any sort of simple homology; the means by which intellectual “cyberwar” serves the state remain, to some degree, obscure. I would hope that enough thinkers soon become sufficiently bored with the standard critical tropes about military simulation to move on to a more incisive critique of the connections between our software and the military’s.

     

    For the moment, this one observation: simulation means that intellectual warfare is always fought on other grounds. It is precisely the sort of virtual war it condemns. It is not a pure extension of politics but a form of ritual warfare, a phenomenon of the ritual dimension of politics and of the political deployment of ritual. War games of every kind present us with modes of simulation, of surrogation, that should not be addressed solely by reference to some terrible, displaced reality that criticism can or cannot locate behind the veil of the video image.28 What we witness is rather the oblique necessity of virtual violence itself, of surrogate conflicts even in the very critique of surrogacy: the necessary satisfaction of a demand for warfare that war alone cannot fully satisfy.

     

    So perhaps we still face nothing more than a Mirror: All discursive warfare is autoaggressive. We sacrifice ourselves in the name of an ego-ideal and become the enemy that we behold.

     

    VI. Number:

     

    If discursive combat is decided by might more than by right, we should allow for the remote possibility that intellectual warfare can be quantified, measured, calculated, perhaps with the sorts of empirical tools that have been developed in recent years by such social scientists as J. David Singer, K.N. Waltz, and Magnus Midlarsky, in their studies of international conflict.29 Given the friction and fog of war and the difficulties it poses for any sort of analysis, however, it might also be advisable to entertain the folly of empirical, systems-oriented research in this area. The contradiction is vital: intellectual warfare is just as quantifiable as any form of military engagement, which is to say, absolutely and hardly at all.

     

    In the critical discourse of war, number operates exactly as Kant predicted in the analytic of the sublime. The determination of quantity is overwhelmed by a Clausewitzian escalation of force past its measurable limit, which is then taken as its true destination. The mathematical sublime is the suppressed dream of every empirical study of warfare.

     

    Hence the intellectual war machine will pursue the potential of number in Deleuze’s sense as well, no longer a quantity in the striated space of the state, the university, the discipline, but a determining movement or speed through smooth, nomadic space (TP 381); a mode of transit rather than a measured sum. Deleuze’s “numbering number” could be said to begin at the point where the mathematical sublime leaves number behind for x, for the infinite; number then rediscovers itself outside striated space, no longer the perpetual trace of the imminent loss of numerical representation, but a singular space in which one actually moves — a space still entirely outside the current occasion.

     

    VII. High Ground:

     

    Is this what Pierre Bezukov hoped to observe when he climbed a fortified hill to gaze down on the Battle of Borodino? Kant: “War itself, provided it is conducted with order and a sacred respect for the rights of civilians, has something sublime about it, and gives nations that carry it on in such a measure a stamp of mind only the more sublime the more numerous the dangers to which they are exposed, and which they are able to meet with fortitude.”30 Perhaps that is what Tolstoy would have us believe Pierre did see: all the sublimely ennobling horrors of war. But let us imagine that he also witnessed the sublime from another perspective, that he saw the flatness of the abyss, a flat figure of lofty visions of bottomless depths.

     

    In Daniel Pick’s account of the war machine, two contending forces are in play: the increasing technical efficiency and rationalization of warfare, and an insistent figuration of war as a destructive energy that surpasses every effort of rational control. Warfare “assumes a momentum of its own which is difficult, even impossible to stop. . . . Battle is now nothing more than the autonomy . . . of the war machine,” the “unstoppable engine of war” (11). It is as if this machine obeyed the familiar logic of the Frankenstein mythos, in which the most rationalized human technology must eventually reveal its madness and destroy everything, including its creator. War too is reason’s war against itself: “nothing less than a catastrophic eclipse of sense, a bestial and mechanical descent into anarchy” (20). No Kritik can ever master it; one can never rise to the exact height above battle, high enough to see but not so high that one loses its detail, because the exact height doesn’t exist; it is an ideal standpoint. In respect to war, thought always shoots past its mark. That is why there is a war in On War. “Questions of friction, illness, madness, morals, fear and anarchy continuously need to be mastered by [Clausewitz], converted back into manageable currency which enables decision-making. He presides over and marshalls his thoughts, like a general seeking to retain control over potentially wayward troops” (40); and, as every reader of Clausewitz, including Clausewitz himself, knows full well, the war in On War gets out of hand. That is part of the attraction of the new war studies: even as warfare becomes a function of knowledge production it reveals itself as the transgressed limit of knowledge, as the very agent of its destruction. The thought of war is the sublimely desirable experience of thought’s abyss.

     

    War is sublime.31 The theory-war in Clausewitz’s text, the war between knowledge and everything proper to it that surpasses and destroys it, signals the way war takes its place beside tragedy as a sublime for philosophy, theory, and critical studies. The sublime of war study is one of theory’s recuperated figures of its own imaginary abyss, an abyss in which it seeks its deepest reflection. Whatever the truth of war, what we witness here first of all is thought’s fascination with an imaginary and quite compelling depth projected out of an obscure “drive” for its own “death.” If the self-destruction of the family in classical tragedy is an interior form of this paper abyss, the contemplation of warfare serves as one of its public forms, as the sublime for a political criticism, already scaled down from the recent, imaginary apocalypses of nuclear criticism.32 “The issue,” Rose writes,

     

    seems to be not so much what might be the truth of war, but the relationship of war to the category of truth. . . . Friction, dissolution, fluidity . . . surface in defiance of a resistant totalization. . . . In Clausewitz’s text, war seems to figure as the violent repressed of its own rationalization. It becomes, so to speak, the unconscious of itself . . . an intruder or foreign body that fastens and destroys. It is the perfect image of the alien-ness that Freud places at the heart of human subjectivity, the alien-ness whose denial or projection leads us into war. In Clausewitz’s text, the theorization of war seems finally to be taken over by its object. The attempt to theorize or master war, to subordinate it to absolute knowledge, becomes a way of perpetuating or repeating war itself. (23-24)

     

    Under the aegis of a critique of war technology, critical discourse becomes a machine that both rationalizes the contests of thought and surpasses rational control. The end of this conflict, of intellectual warfare as such, is a terminal image of reason’s self-destruction, of the Endlightenment, an ideal we will fight to the deathto fall short of. Hard critical knowledge will no more lead us past this end than knowledge of war leads humanity past armed conflict.

     

    VIII. Chaos:

     

    Consider what Clausewitz calls the fog of war — its untheorizable turmoil, error, accidents, chance, the sheer disorientation of combat terror. The fog of war is quite literally noise, war’s resistance to language, to objectification, to the code: both its problematic and its seductiveness, the limit of its intelligibility and the depth of its sublimity.

     

    There are two approaches to this fog. One can try to burn it off with the bright intensity of analysis, as if it were only a surface effect, even though everything would lead one to believe that fog is an irreducible element of war, something that must be taken into account, that cannot simply be withdrawn. Then perhaps one ought instead to attempt to map this fog, not in order to eliminate it but to put it to use. The fog of war might be more than an enemy of reason: it might be a tactical advantage.

     

    But how to map the fog of war? I anticipate an increase in references to chaos theory, discourse analyses deploying language like the following:

     

    military interest in turbulent phenomena revolves around the question of its negative effects in the performance of weapons systems or the effects of air drag on projectiles or water drag on submarines. But for our purposes, we want an image not of the external effects of turbulent flows, but of their internal structure. We are not concerned here with the destructive effects that a hurricane, for instance, may produce, but with the intricate patterns of eddies and vortices that define its inner structure. . . . In order to better understand turbulence, we must first rid ourselves of the idea that turbulent behavior represents a form of chaos.

     

    For a long time turbulence was identified with disorder or noise. Today we know that this is not the case. Indeed, while turbulent motion appears as irregular or chaotic on the macroscopic scale, it is, on the contrary, highly organized on the microscopic scale. The multiple space and time scales involved in turbulence correspond to the coherent behavior of millions and millions of molecules. Viewed in this way, the transition from laminar flow to turbulence is a process of self-organization.33

     

    It remains to be seen whether and to what extent the turbulence of intellectual warfare obeys the theoretical laws of chaos. Perhaps it will become possible to map the way epistemic breakthroughs stabilize themselves as singularities and fractal “eddies within eddies” (De Landa), increasingly dense, detailed, and localized skirmishes in entropic disciplinary subfields. I imagine that the effect would be at one and the same time to deepen the breakthrough, by intensifying subconflictual areas within the field, and to dissipate it. Again: resistance, subversion, opposition, etc., stabilize quite as much as they destabilize. The deepening specificity of gender criticism, for instance, might represent the regulation of gender conflict as much as its disruptive potential: its increasing density becomes the paradoxical mark of its dissipating force. It is just as likely, however, that attempts to apply chaos physics within analyses of discursive warfare will constitute nothing more than another set of tropes, another pipe dream of a scientific humanities, another mathematical sublime: the same contradictory desire for the rational conquest of phenomena that seem to escape reason and the autodestruction of reason in the process that one finds in Clausewitz.

     

    Even if fog cannot be reduced to a science without being caught up in the mechanics of critical sublimity, one might still pursue its tactical uses. There is no question that the military is committed to deploying the fog of war. The importance of disinformation, propaganda, jamming, covert operations, “PsyOps,” and so on increases as warfare becomes more dependent on technical and tactical knowledge. As the power of reconnaissance and surveillance grows, so does the tactical importance of stealth technology. Virilio remarks that, in the hunt, the speed of perception annuls the distance between the hunter and the quarry. Survival depends on distance: “once you can see the target, you can destroy it” (WC 19, 4). Thus, from now on, “power is in disappearance: under the sea with nuclear submarines, in the air with U2s, spyplanes, or still higher with satellites and the space shuttle” (PW 146). “If what is perceived is already lost, it becomes necessary to invest in concealment what used to be invested in simple exploitation of one’s available forces — hence the spontaneous generation of new Stealth weapons. . . . The inversion of the deterrence principle is quite clear: unlike weapons which have to be publicized if they are to have a real deterrence effect, Stealth equipment can only function if its existence is clouded with uncertainty” (WC 4). For Virilio, stealth is not a matter of radar-immune bombers alone: it involves a vast “aesthetics of disappearance” that reaches an order of perfection in state terrorism:

     

    Until the Second World War — until the concentration camps — societies were societies of incarceration, of imprisonment in the Foucauldian sense. The great transparency of the world, whether through satellites or simply tourists, brought about an overexposure of these places to observation, to the press and public opinion which now ban concentration camps. You can’t isolate anything in this world of ubiquity and instantaneousness. Even if some camps still exist, this overexposure of the world led to the need to surpass enclosure and imprisonment. This required another kind of repression, which is disappearance. . . . Bodies must disappear. People don’t exist. There is a big fortune in this technology because it’s so similar to what happened in the history of war. In war, we’ve seen how important disappearance, camouflage, dissimulation are — every war is a war of cunning.34

     

    The methods of strategic disappearance developed by terrorist states are the most insidious form of secrecy. That is why Virilio, the anti-technologist, believes that the technology of secrecy must be exposed. Every order of stealth weaponry is purely and simply a threat. The aesthetics of disappearance must be reappeared. For Virilio, as well as for the reconnaissance cameras whose history he records, success depends on the logistics of perception, on closing the distance between the critic and his quarry. But what if critics are not only hunters; what if they are the quarry as well?

     

    Michel de Certeau points out that, for Clausewitz, the distinction between strategy and tactics is determined not only by scales of conflict (war vs. battle) but by relative magnitudes of power. Strategy is for the strong, and it is deployed in known, visible, mapped spaces; tactics is “an art of the weak,” of those who must operate inside territory controlled by a greater power; it takes place on the ground of the “other,” inside alien space.35 It must therefore deploy deception in the face of a power “bound by its very visibility.” De Certeau suggests that even in cases where the weak force has already been sighted, it might use deception to great advantage. This is another lesson from Clausewitz: “trickery is possible for the weak, and often it is his only possibility, as a ‘last resort’: The weaker the forces at the disposition of the strategist, the more the strategist will be able to use deception.” In the “practice of daily life,” in spaces of signification, in the contests of critical argument, such a tactics of the weak would also apply:

     

    Lacking its own place, lacking a view of the whole, limited by the blindness (which may lead to perspicacity) resulting from combat at close quarters, limited by the possibilities of the moment, a tactic is determined by the absence of power just as a strategy is organized by the postulation of power. From this point of view, the dialectic of a tactic may be illuminated by the ancient art of sophistic. As the author of a great “strategic” system, Aristotle was also very interested in the procedures of this enemy which perverted, as he saw it, the order of truth. He quotes a formula of this protean, quick, and surprising adversary that, by making explicit the basis of sophistic, can also serve finally to define a tactic as I understand it here: it is a matter, Corax said, of “making the worse argument seem the better.” In its paradoxical concision, this formula delineates the relationship of forces that is the starting point for an intellectual creativity that is subtle, tireless, ready for every opportunity, scattered over the terrain of the dominant order and foreign to the rules laid down and imposed by a rationality founded on established rights and property. (38)

     

    And yet it is rare that any of this ever occurs to critics, who seem to believe that “subversion” consists of vicarious identification with subversives, and of telling everything one knows to one’s enemies.

     

    It is nonetheless already the case that, in critical discourse, behind all the humanistic myths of communication, understanding, and interpretive fidelity, one finds the tactical value of misinterpretations. In an argument it is often crucial for combatants not to know their enemy, to project instead a paper figure, a distortion, against which they can conceive and reinforce their own positions. Intelligence, here, is not only knowledge of one’s enemies but the tactical lies one tells about them, even to oneself. This is so regular a phenomenon of discursive conflict that it cannot be dismissed as an aberration that might be remedied through better communication, better listening skills, more disinterested criticism. One identifies one’s own signal in part by jamming everyone else’s, setting it off from the noise one generates around it. There is, in other words, already plenty of fog in discursive warfare, and yet we tend to remain passive in the face of it, and for the most part completely and uncritically committed to exposing ourselves to attack. Imagine what might be possible for a writing that is not insistently positional, not devoted to shoring itself up, to fixing itself in place, to laying out all its plans under the eyes of its opponents. Nothing, after all, has been more fatal for the avant-gardes than the form of the manifesto. If only surrealism had been more willing to lie, to dissimulate, to abandon the petty narcissism of the position and the desire to explain itself to anyone who would listen, and instead explored the potential offered it by the model of the secret society it also hoped to be. Intellectual warfare must therefore investigate the tactical advantages of deception and clandestinity over the habitual, quasi-ethical demands of clarity and forthrightness, let alone the narcissistic demands of self-promotion and mental exhibitionism, from however fortified a position. If to be seen by the enemy is to be destroyed, then intellectual warfare must pursue its own stealth technology. Self-styled intellectual warriors will explore computer networks not only as more rapid means of communication and publishing but as means for circumventing publication, as semi-clandestine lines of circulation, encoded correspondence, and semiotic speed. There will be no entirely secure secrecy, just as there are no impregnable positions — that too is Virilio’s argument — but a shrouded nomadism is already spreading in and around major discursive conflicts. There are many more than nine grounds, but the rest are secret.

     

    IX. Cemetery:

     

    When the notion that knowledge is not only power but a mode of warfare has gained sufficient currency, criticism will take it upon itself to develop the strategic implications of thought, and to combat the coordination of the “knowledge industries” with the military-industrial complex. Here, however, on this final ground, already razed by the self-consuming turbulence of battle, the project of war study is neither to serve the state nor to oppose it, but rather to trivialize the very idea of war, as we trivialize everything we take up as sublime.

     

    Even as it imposes itself with unprecedented force, intellectual warfare is already dead. It is death carried out by other means. Do not mistake this claim. It has nothing to do with saying that war talk will stop; on the contrary, we will be subjected to it as never before precisely because it is dead. Let me repeat this essay’s fundamental law: The object of criticism is always a phenomenalization of some systemic device of discourse, and it always appears in a surrogate form at the very moment it is no longer functional. The task in respect to the knowledge and critique of war is thus not developmental but simulacral, a term whose own recent fate attests to its truth. Everything that Baudrillard’s theory of simulation was about happened to the theory itself: the sublime disappearance of its own referent through its obscene overexposure, its precipitous reduction to a mere bit of intellectual currency that quickly expended all its value and force. But what if that is the task of intellectual warfare as well: not to advance and defend the new truths of war but to ruin them in the very act of construing them, to level whatever criticism has assigned to itself of war’s sublimity, to recast it in the proxy forms of mental war toys and pitch them about in mock combats, in ritual battles for possession of the dead, waged in the name of the dead and on dead ground, and most of all to cast their shades across the future.

     

    We — and who really is speaking here? is it the dead themselves? — we come to fight discourse’s war against itself. We are soldiers of an intellectual “suicide state” that practices the politics of its own disappearance (PW 90). War for us is no longer an idea, a historical object, or even a sublime image: all these are only symptoms of an autoaggressive drive, a rage for self-destruction, a turbulent movement that distributes and evacuates every image and idea. We are like Kleist’s Kolhaas or Penthesilea, in a question posed by Deleuze and Guattari: “Is it the destiny of the war machine, when the State triumphs, to be caught in this alternative: either to be nothing more than the disciplined, military organ of the State apparatus, or to turn against itself, to become a double suicide machine?”36 It is certainly one task of A Thousand Plateaus to avoid reducing its field to such alternatives, such ethico-political choices — to project and affirm different possibilities. But here, at this moment and on this ground, imagine Kolhaas on the scaffold, reading the future of the state in a text that he always carried close to his heart but never before considered, and swallowing it without uttering its truth at the very instant he expires.

     

    Notes

     

    1. See, for instance, Susan Griffin, A Chorus of Stones: The Private Life of War (New York: Doubleday, 1992); Miriam Cooke and Angela Woollacott, eds., Gendering Wartalk (Princeton: Princeton UP, 1993); Cynthia Enloe, The Morning After: Sexual Politics at the End of the Cold War (Berkeley: U of California P, 1993); Garry Wills, “Critical Inquiry in Clausewitz,” in W.J.T. Mitchell, ed., The Politics of Interpretation, special issue of Critical Inquiry (Chicago: U of Chicago P, 1982, 1983) 159-80; Mette Hjort, The Strategy of Letters (Cambridge: Harvard UP, 1993).

     

    2. Elaine Scarry, The Body in Pain: The Making and Unmaking of the World (New York: Oxford UP, 1985); cited in John Muse, “War on War,” War After War, ed. Nancy J. Peters (San Francisco: City Lights Books, 1992) 55.

     

    3. Randy Allen Harris, The Linguistics Wars (Oxford: Oxford UP, 1993); Gerald Graff, Beyond the Culture Wars: How Teaching Conflicts Can Revitalize American Education (New York: Norton, 1992); Avital Ronell, Crack Wars: Literature, Addiction, Mania (Lincoln: U of Nebraska P, 1992).

     

    4. Friedrich Nietzsche, “On Truth and Lie in an Extra-Moral Sense,” The Portable Nietzsche, ed. and trans. Walter S. Kaufmann (New York: Vintage Books, 1954) 46. See also Avital Ronell, “Support Our Tropes,” in War After War 47-51. On war as a metaphor for argument, see George Lakoff and Mark Johnson, Metaphors We Live By (Chicago: U of Chicago P,1980).

     

    5. Carl von Clausewitz, On War, trans. Michael Howard and Peter Paret (Princeton: Princeton UP, 1976); Paul Virilio, Speed and Politics, trans. Mark Polizzotti (New York: Semiotext(e), 1986); Virilio and Sylvère Lotringer, Pure War, trans. Mark Polizzotti (New York: Semiotext(e), 1983); Virilio, War and Cinema: The Logistics of Perception, trans. Patrick Camiller (London: Verso, 1989).

     

    6. Hans Magnus Enzensberger, The Consciousness Industry: On Literature, Politics and the Media, ed. Michael Roloff (New York: Seabury Press, 1974).

     

    7. One example of ressentiment calling itself war: Sande Cohen, Academia and the Luster of Capital (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1993).

     

    8. The figure of the nine grounds is taken from Sun Tzu, The Art of War, trans. Thomas Cleary (Boston: Shambhala, 1991) 88-105. This is not a scholarly edition, but precisely the sort of volume one might pick up in an airport, one of a series of “spiritual” handbooks including Buddhist and Taoist texts and works by Thomas Merton, Marcus Aurelius, and Rilke. Sun Tzu’s own grounds are, of course, quite different; it would be interesting to develop the grounds he stipulates as grounds for intellectual war as well.

     

    9. The question of degree is crucial. If certain orders of humanistic discourse tend to suppress the strategic aspects of cultural exchange, the new war discourse will exaggerate them.

     

    10. Alvin and Heidi Toffler, War and Anti-War: Survival at the Dawn of the 21st Century (Boston: Little Brown & Co., 1993). On the figure of “cyberwar,” see James Der Derian, Antidiplomacy: Spies, Terror, Speed, and War (Cambridge, MA.: Blackwell, 1992).

     

    11. Georges Bataille, The Accursed Share: An Essay on General Economy: Vol. I (Consumption); Vols. II (The History of Eroticism) and III (Sovereignty), trans. Robert Hurley (New York: Zone Books, 1988, 1991); “The Notion of Expenditure,” in Visions of Excess: Selected Writings, 1927-1939, ed. Allan Stoekl, trans. Stoekl et al. (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1985) 116-29.

     

    12. Alexandre Kojève, Introduction to the Reading of Hegel: Lectures on the Phenomenology of Spirit, ed. Allan Bloom, trans. James H. Nichols, Jr. (Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1969) 11.

     

    13. Daniel Pick, The War Machine: The Rationalisation of Slaughter in the Modern Age (New Haven: Yale UP, 1993) 7-8.

     

    14. Peter Paret, Understanding War: Essays on Clausewitz and the History of Military Power (Princeton: Princeton UP, 1992) 85.

     

    15. Jacqueline Rose, Why War? — Psychoanalysis, Politics, and the Return to Melanie Klein (Oxford: Blackwell, 1993) 18. Rose’s chief text from Freud is “Why War?” (1932) in The Standard Edition of the Complete Psycholgical Works, ed. and trans. James Strachey (London: Hogarth, 1955) 22: 195-215.

     

    16. In Zizek’s vigorous defense, Hegel has already accounted for this crisis, and attempts to reduce the dialectic merely to its most formal and totalizing elements misconceive, among other things, the perpetual surplus of negation. See Slavoj Zizek, Enjoy Your Symptom: Jacques Lacan in Hollywood and Out (New York: Routledge, 1992); For They Know Not What They Do: Enjoyment As a Political Factor (London: Verso, 1991); and Tarrying with the Negative: Kant, Hegel, and the Critique of Ideology Durham: Duke UP, 1993).

     

    17. See also John Keegan’s account of fortification in The History of Warfare (New York: Knopf, 1993) 139-52.

     

    18. Gilles Deleuze and Félix Guattari, A Thousand Plateaus: Capitalism and Schizophrenia, Volume II, trans. Brian Massumi (Minneapolis: U of Minnesota P, 1987), 389-90.

     

    19. One must, of course, refer here to Foucault’s vast elaboration of this term in The Archaeology of Knowledge and the Discourse on Language, trans. A.M. Sheridan Smith (New York: Harper and Row, 1976); Discipline and Punish: The Birth of the Prison, trans. Alan Sheridan (New York: Vintage, 1977); Language, Counter-Memory, Practice: Selected Essays and Interviews, ed. Donald F. Bouchard, trans. Donald F. Bouchard and Sherry Simon (Ithaca: Cornell UP, 1977); Power/Knowledge: Selected Interviews and Other Writings, 1972-1977, ed. Colin Gordon, trans. Colin Gordon, Leo Marshall, John Mepham, Kate Soper (New York: Pantheon Books, 1980); and other works.

     

    20. See A Thousand Plateaus, especially Plateau 12: “1227: Treatise on Nomadology — The War Machine,” 351-423. For Deleuze’s most relevant preliminary explorations of nomad thought, see Nietzsche and Philosophy, trans. Hugh Tomlinson (New York: Columbia UP, 1983), and The Logic of Sense, ed. Constantin V. Boundas, trans. Mark Lester with Charles Stivale (New York: Columbia UP, 1990).

     

    21. There are several instance of the former in a recent issue of Yale French Studies; nomadology there is rarely more than an interpretive prosthesis for sedentary academics. See Françoise Lionnet and Ronnie Scharfman, eds., Post/Colonial Conditions: Exiles, Migrations, and Nomadisms, spec. issue of Yale French Studies 82:1 (1993).

     

    22. Jean Baudrillard and Sylve`re Lotringer, Forget Foucault, trans. Philip Beitchman, Lee Hildreth, and Mark Polizzotti (New York: Semiotext(e), 1987) 127-28.

     

    23. I have already suggested that the very procedures of this essay constitute, at least for me, an exploration, quite preliminary and by no means successful, of the mode of nomadic thought itself. A ground is not a sort of geo-narcissistic foundation, a stand that is more plausible the more solid and immovable one can make it, but a strategic field across whose surface one moves and deploys one’s forces for the duration of a particular tactical encounter, in a manner that uses and may even defend the ground but does not finally attach itself to it. At all points, one must take into account the multiplicity of grounds and the fact that the field or ground itself changes given the forces in conflict upon it. This would seem to resemble Wills’s version of Clausewitzian Kritik, put into motion; insofar as that is the case, one cannot be too attached to the idea of nomadism either: as I argue at various points (grounds 2 and 7), the chaos of conflict itself militates against the full clarification of any tactic, and one must avoid the facile opposition of theory and Kritik (i.e., practice). And one must also avoid becoming too attached to Deleuze and Guattari, or to “Nomadology,” or to any body of thought, lest one turn one’s own work into sedentary commentary on a position.

     

    24. For the Deleuze-Guattari treatment of nomadic numbering, see A Thousand Plateaus 387-94.

     

    25. Deleuze, with Claire Parnet, Dialogues, trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjam (New York: Columbia UP, 1987) 93.

     

    26. On the figure of the rhizome, see the introduction to A Thousand Plateaus 3-25.

     

    27. Manuel De Landa, War in the Age of Intelligent Machines (New York: Zone Books, 1991) 11 ff.

     

    28. It is by no means in order to defend Baudrillard’s position that one notes how, in this context, critics who dismiss the notion of simulation in the name of some political or historical reality are themselves caught up in the very same “precession of simulacra.” Baudrillard: “the successive phases of the image: it is the reflection of a basic reality; it masks and perverts a basic reality; it marks the absence of a basic reality; it bears no relation to any reality whatsoever: it is its own pure simulacrum.” Simulations, trans. Paul Foss, Paul Patton, and Philip Beitchman (New York: Semiotext(e), 1983) 11. For Baudrillard’s notion of strategy, see Fatal Strategies, ed. Jim Fleming, trans. Philip Beitchman and W.D.J. Niesluchowski (New York: Semiotext(e), 1990).

     

    29. See, for instance, Magnus I. Midlarsky, ed., Handbook of War Studies (Ann Arbor: U of Michigan P, 1989).

     

    30. Immanuel Kant, Critique of Judgement, trans. James Creed Meredith (Oxford: Oxford UP, 1986) 112-13.

     

    31. We might also call war the sublime of the state. As Pick remarks, in Clausewitz, “friction occurs within war, rather than in the nature of the relation of war to politics,” but “a more radical interrogation of war is also implied; we glimpse a war machine which threatens the political state with something madder, more disabling and disruptive than the dominant formulation of On War suggests” (32-33). War is the state’s own limit text, its proper transgression of itself, its essential and constitutive surplus, its seductive symptom of the death drive.

     

    32. See Klein, Richard, ed., Nuclear Criticism, spec. issue of Diacritics 14.2 (Summer 1984).

     

    33. The first passage is from De Landa, 14-15; the second is cited by De Landa (15) and is taken from Ilya Prigogine and Isabelle Stengers, Order Out of Chaos (New York: Bantam Books, 1984) 141. See also James Gleick, Chaos: Making a New Science (New York: Penguin Books, 1987).

     

    34. Pure War 88-89. See also Virilio, The Aesthetics of Disappearance, trans. Philip Beitchman (New York: Semiotext(e), 1991).

     

    35. Michel De Certeau, The Practice of Everyday Life, trans. Steven Rendall (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1984) 37.

     

    36. A Thousand Plateaus 356. Heinrich von Kleist, The Marquise of O– and Other Stories, trans. David Luke and Nigel Reeves (London: Penguin Books, 1978).